JP7353618B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, and is particularly applicable to pachinko gaming machines and the like.

Conventionally, gaming machines are equipped with presentation devices such as liquid crystal displays, movable accessories (gimmicks), and speakers, and various presentations are performed as the game progresses. Some gaming machines of this type have a function of using a real-time clock (RTC) or the like to execute a special performance that is different from the usual performance that accompanies the progress of the game every time a predetermined time is measured. By installing a plurality of gaming machines equipped with such functions side by side on an island facility in a gaming hall, special performances by the plurality of gaming machines can be executed at the same time at a predetermined period (for example, as described in Patent Document 1). reference).

JP 2014-180295 Publication

However, the function of executing a special performance at predetermined time intervals is already well known, and simply providing this function is not sufficient to improve the game's interest .

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and its purpose is to improve the enjoyment of gaming in a gaming machine that is equipped with a function of executing special performances at predetermined intervals.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention employs the following configuration.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
identification information display means capable of displaying identification information;
special game execution means capable of executing a special game in which a predetermined gaming profit can be awarded to a player based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming a specific display result;
a special performance execution means capable of executing a special performance with a predetermined execution period at a predetermined cycle;
comprising a preview effect execution means capable of executing a preview effect indicating the possibility that the display result of the variable display will become the specific display result,
The preview performance includes at least a first preview performance and a second preview performance,
The first preview performance is executed by displaying a suggestive image suggesting the possibility on a predetermined display section,
The preview performance execution means is
It is possible to execute the second preview performance after executing the first preview performance both outside the execution period and during the execution period of the special performance,
When the first preview performance is executed outside the execution period of the special performance, a first suggestion image is displayed as the suggestion image, and when the first preview performance is executed during the execution period of the special performance, the first suggestion image is displayed as the suggestion image. Displaying a second suggestion image having different display content from the first suggestion image as an image,
The gist is that the second preview performance can be executed in the same manner both outside and during the execution period of the special performance.

According to the present invention as described above, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of a game machine that is equipped with a function of executing a special performance at predetermined time intervals.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a back view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a front view showing the configuration of a game board according to an embodiment of the present invention. 4 is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, and is a diagram showing displays included in the gaming machine. FIG. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the gaming machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between the type of winning and the opening pattern of the big prize opening. It is a table showing various random numbers obtained by the game control microcomputer. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot type determination table, (C) is a reach determination table, (D) is a normal symbol hit determination table, and (E) is a regular symbol variation table. This is a pattern selection table. It is a table showing a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of main control main processing. It is a flowchart of interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of starting port sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of starting pitch entry. It is a flowchart of normal figure movement processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol propriety determination processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol fluctuation processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of normal electric accessories processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 standby processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 propriety judgment processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 fluctuation processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 standby processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 propriety judgment processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 fluctuation processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 1 (jackpot game). It is a flowchart of jackpot game start processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state setting processing. It is a flowchart of special figure operation status setting processing 1. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 2 (small winning game). It is a flowchart of special figure operation status setting process 2. It is a flowchart of pending ball number processing. It is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing. It is a flowchart of sub-control main processing. 3 is a flowchart of reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 2ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart of a fluctuating production start process. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a sub-control board according to a second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart of special performance related processing of Example 2. It is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of a special performance (RTC performance) of Example 2, (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display screen where a preliminary performance is performed, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display screen where a leading role is performed. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display screen when a special performance (RTC performance) is executed during the special game state of the second embodiment. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display screen on which a first preview performance is normally performed in the second embodiment. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display screen on which a special first preview effect of Example 2 is performed. It is a first preview performance determination table of Example 2. It is a flowchart of special performance related processing of Example 3. 10 is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing according to the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart of special performance cancellation selection processing of Example 4.

Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described using examples. In addition, in the following, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the fluctuating display of the symbol, the pachinko gaming machine is capable of executing a winning game that can award a predetermined amount of gaming profits (for example, prize balls) to the player. , an example to which the present invention is applied will be explained.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2 attached within the game machine frame 50. It is configured to be detachable from the frame 50. FIG. 3 shows the game board 2 removed from the game machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main frame 52 for mounting the gaming board 2, etc., and an outer frame 53 for mounting the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the island equipment of the hall. ing. The outer frame 53 is fixed to the island equipment, and the front frame 51 and main body frame 52 are attached to the outer frame via upper and lower frame hinges 56, 56. Further, the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are pivotally supported at one end in the vertical direction (on the left side of the paper in FIG. 1), and can be opened and closed, respectively, relative to the outer frame 53 with the one end as an axis. It is configured. Further, from the closed state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, only the front frame 51 can be opened (opened), or both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 can be opened (opened).

In addition, the front frame 51 includes a firing handle 60 for firing the game ball with a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of operation (rotation angle) of the player, and a firing handle 60 that can store game balls and supply the stored game balls to the firing device side. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the batted ball supply tray 61 are provided. Further, on the front frame 51, a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b are provided that allow the player to perform a predetermined input by operating them during the execution of a game effect that is executed as the game progresses. (These two presentation buttons are also collectively referred to simply as "performance button 63" or "input means"). The plurality of performance buttons can be selectively used depending on the type of game performance. Note that the configuration of the production button 63 is not limited to the aspect of the first embodiment, and may be any type that can detect an input from a player, or an input detection means (for example, , a retractable type, a touch sensor type, etc.), or a non-contact type input detection means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects the proximity of a part of the player's body and performs an input. good.

Further, the front frame 51 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and an image display device (a second image display device 71, a third image display device 72). Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are arranged in front of the front frame 51 (on the player side) so that the display screens 71a and 72a can be easily viewed by the player. It is installed so as to protrude toward the outside and to be inclined outward. In addition, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, like the image display device 7 described later, depending on the execution/non-execution of a game, the game situation, the game effect to be executed, etc. Game productions (characters, production patterns, etc.), demo productions, and game-related information (ball information obtained, number of rounds, number of consecutive wins, remaining period of game status, game mode, reliability and explanation of game productions, etc.) , information regarding the settings of the gaming machine (volume setting information, brightness setting information, etc.) is displayed. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may display different information among these pieces of information, or may display the same information. In addition, when the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display different information among these pieces of information, there are cases where the same information is displayed. There are cases where it is done. Also, any two of the image display device 7 (first image display device), second image display device 71, and third image display device 72 display the same information, and the remaining one displays different information. may also be displayed. Note that any or all of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 may be simply referred to as an "image display device."

Further, the image display device 7 is provided in the inner region of the game area 3 formed on the game board 2, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided in the outer region of the game area 3. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (provided at the non-open end) is attached to the front frame 51 via a second image display device hinge 75 (hinge portion). It is being Therefore, it is rotatable in the left-right direction about the upper and lower second image display device hinges 75 as an axis. More specifically, it is configured to be able to rotate by a predetermined angle (approximately 45 degrees) in the right direction from the state shown in FIG. 1 (normal state). This is because when the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are opened with the upper and lower frame hinges 56, 56 as axes, the second image display device 71, which is provided to protrude in front of the front frame 51, This configuration is to prevent damage caused by collision with the hall equipment (ball rental machines, inter-machine equipment, etc.) provided adjacent to the frame hinge 56 side of the gaming machine 1 (on the left side of the paper in FIG. 1). . On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (provided at the open end) is fixedly provided to the front frame 51 and cannot be rotated.

The game board 2 has a game area 3 surrounded by a rail member 4, into which game balls shot by operating a shooting handle 60 flow down. The game board 2 is also provided with a board lamp 5 for decoration. A plurality of game nails 16 for guiding game balls are provided in the game area 3 in a protruding manner. Further, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, making it possible to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the firing device side.

Further, near the center of the gaming area 3, an image display device 7 made of a liquid crystal display device is provided. Note that the image display device 7 is attached to the game board 2 from the back side of the game board 2. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a performance pattern display area 7b (also referred to as a "performance pattern display area") in which performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (also simply referred to as "performance patterns") are displayed side by side in the left and right direction. ), and the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are set according to the game state (low-accuracy low base state, high-accuracy low base state, low-accuracy high base state, high-accuracy high base state). A variable display is performed in synchronization with a variable display of a special symbol (a first special symbol or a second special symbol described later) that is set as the main character of the game. In addition, the production pattern 8L is also referred to as the "left symbol," the production symbol 8C is also referred to as the "middle symbol," and the production symbol 8R is also referred to as the "right symbol."

The display mode of the performance symbol display area 7b shown in FIG. 3 shows one scene when the gaming state is in the normal state (low probability low base state, state A to be described later). As will be described in detail later, in this low-accuracy low base state, the frequency of game balls entering the starting port (second starting port 21) is set lower than in the high base state (first gaming state). In addition, the probability of determining the validity of the special symbol (the first special symbol validity determination and the second special symbol validity determination) is a low probability (also referred to as a "predetermined probability"), and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is the first special symbol. is set longer (more than twice) than the fluctuation time of (all out-of-range fluctuations are 10 minutes). Therefore, in the normal state, a game ball is fired into the right game area 3B (second game area) and entered into the starting port (second starting port 21 or third starting port 26) to display the second special symbol in a variable manner. It is more advantageous for the player to play a game in which a game ball is fired into the left game area 3A (first game area) and enters the first starting port 20, and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. has been done. That is, the normal state can be said to be a gaming state in which the first special symbol (performance symbol) is mainly displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, in the normal state (state A), the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the performance symbol display area 7b are designed to perform variable display and stop display in synchronization with the first special symbol.

In addition, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R each consist of a plurality of symbols (identification information) representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. Depending on the display mode (stop display mode) of the left, middle, and right performance symbols that are stopped and displayed (derived display) in the performance symbol display area 7b, the first special symbol display 41a ("first The results of the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as the "second special symbol display section") and the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as the "second special symbol display section") The results of symbol variation display (results of special symbol propriety determination) are displayed (notified) so that the player can easily recognize them. Incidentally, any (or all) of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the production symbol may be simply referred to as "design" or "identification information." Further, the special symbol validity determination is also simply referred to as "validity determination" or "first validity determination." Further, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the special symbol validity determination is also referred to as "validity determination execution means" or "first validity determination execution means."

For example, if the result of the special symbol validity judgment is a jackpot (first specific hit), the production symbol will be stopped at a symbol with the same three digits (double number) such as "777" (also referred to as a "jackpot symbol"). indicate. In addition, in the case of a small hit (second specific win), a preset chance symbol such as "135" or a special small-hit symbol such as "3★3" (also referred to as a "small hit symbol") will be used. Stop displaying the symbol. In addition, when a small hit occurs, instead of stopping and displaying the small winning symbol, the small winning symbol and the losing symbol may be stopped and displayed in the same manner. In addition, when there are multiple small wins (first small win, second small win, etc.), different small win patterns (first small win pattern, second small win pattern, etc.) can be used to distinguish them. ) may be stopped and displayed, or the same (common) small winning symbols may be stopped and displayed so that it is difficult to distinguish between them.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol validity judgment is a failure, the performance symbol will be stopped and displayed with a variation pattern in which at least one of the three symbols such as "637" and "373" is different ("The failure symbol ). Thereby, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game (results of the special symbol validity determination) by looking at the performance symbols that are stopped and displayed. In other words, the player generally does not directly understand the result of the special symbol validity determination by looking at the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, but rather The user sees and understands the effect pattern 8 displayed in the pattern display area 7b. In addition, the execution mode of the variable display of the performance symbols includes, for example, a mode in which scrolling is displayed in up and down, left and right, diagonal directions, etc., a mode in which the performance is displayed using only the first performance symbol display section 7b, and a mode in which the performance is displayed using only the first performance symbol display section 7b. 7b, it has a mode in which effects are displayed using one or both of a second effect pattern display section 71a (display screen 71a) and a third effect pattern display section 72a (display screen 72a). Additionally, in addition to this, it may have an aspect in which the effect is displayed using only the second effect symbol display section 71a or the third effect symbol display section 72a.

In addition, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying a game performance using the above-mentioned performance symbols (performance symbol game performance), a game performance that is executed along with a winning game (a jackpot game, a small winning game) is displayed. A winning game performance (a jackpot game performance, a small winning game performance), a demonstration performance for waiting for customers, etc. are displayed. In addition, in the performance symbol game performance, winning game performance, and demonstration performance, in addition to performance symbols such as numbers, performance images other than performance symbols such as background images and character images are also displayed. In addition, although the details will be described later, there is also a gaming state (state A, state B, or state C), a state in which a game is played by firing a game ball into the left gaming area 3A, or a state in which a game is played by firing a gaming ball into the right gaming area 3B. The display mode on the performance symbol display area 7b is different depending on whether the game is being played or the like. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a gaming machine that can variably display both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel (at the same time), and is suitable for this type of game. The machine is also called a "simultaneous variable machine (parallel variable machine)".

In addition, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a first performance reservation display area 9c (first performance reservation display section) that displays a first performance reservation 9a according to the number of stored first special symbol reservations, which will be described later. There is a second performance hold display area 9d (second performance hold display section) that displays a second performance hold 9b according to the number of second special figure hold memories, which will be described later. Depending on the display mode (display number) of the first performance hold 9a or the second performance hold 9b in the performance hold display area, the first special figure hold is displayed on the first special figure hold display 43a (see FIG. 4), which will be described later. It is possible to clearly show to the player the stored number of stored special symbols and the stored number of second special symbols pending displayed on the second special symbol pending display 43b. Note that the display position of the first performance pending display section and the display position of the second performance pending display section may change depending on the gaming state, the gaming mode, or the game performance to be executed (such as a reach performance). In addition, only one of the first performance pending display section and the second performance pending display section (for example, only the performance pending display section corresponding to the main special symbol (performance symbol) depending on the gaming state) is displayed. You can also do this.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7, a center decoration 10 is provided so as to surround the performance symbol display area 7b. A stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which game balls can roll is provided at the lower part of the center decoration body 10. Further, a hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left side of the center decoration body 10. The warp section 12 is provided with a warp entrance and a warp exit, and receives a game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp entrance, discharges the game ball from the warp exit, and guides it to the stage section 11. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage part 11 can enter the first starting port 20, which will be described later, with a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage part 11. Further, on the upper part of the center decorative body 10, a decorative member 13 having an illumination member (board lamp 5) such as an LED, which can be turned on depending on the game state, and which is shaped like letters, figures, etc., is arranged. There is.

Further, at the upper part of the center decoration body 10 and behind the decoration member 13, there is provided a movable decoration member 14 that can be operated in accordance with the game performance. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible, but for example, when a game performance with a relatively high probability of winning is executed, the movable decorative member 14 falls downward (a predetermined The movable decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. This increases the player's interest in the game and increases his or her expectations for winning.

Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 is provided which includes a non-variable first starting port 20 that does not change the ease with which game balls enter the game ball. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a random number for determining the validity of the special symbol, etc. is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is established, the determination of the validity of the first special symbol ( As the first special symbol validity determination (first validity determination) is executed, the first special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the validity determination.

Above the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decoration 10 in the game area 3, there is a gate 28 (regular figure starting opening, passing opening, ball entrance opening, specific starting opening) through which game balls can pass (balls can enter). (also called a mouth) is provided. A game ball that enters from the upstream side of the gate 28 passes through the gate 28 and flows down the gaming area 3 in the downstream direction. Note that this gate 28 also serves as a start gate 29 (also referred to as a winning gate or an operation gate) for starting a jackpot game. In other words, this gate is both the gate 28 and the start gate 29. When a game ball enters (passes through) the gate 28, the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a, a random number etc. for determining the validity of the normal symbol is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (variable condition) is met, the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. At the same time as the symbol validity determination (also referred to as "normal symbol validity determination" or "third validity determination"), the normal symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the normal symbol is displayed based on the result of the normal symbol validity determination. Stop display. When the winning normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the movable member 23 operates (opening operation) and the second starting port 21 becomes open. In addition, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the normal symbol validity determination of whether or not to operate the movable member 23 (opening operation) to open the second starting port 21 is referred to as the “validity determination execution means”. It is also referred to as "third validity determination execution means." Note that this gate sensor 28a also serves as a start gate sensor 29a for starting the jackpot game. That is, the sensor that detects the entry of a ball into the main gate is the gate sensor 28a and also the start gate sensor 29a.

Further, although the details will be described later, when passing through the gate 28 (starting gate 29), the function as the starting gate 29 is demonstrated only when the conditions for executing the jackpot game are satisfied ("jackpot" (also referred to as "executable state" or "jackpot waiting state"). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 (starting gate 29) when the condition (big hit standby state) is not satisfied, control processing regarding the normal symbols is performed and jackpot starting processing is not executed. In addition, if the game ball passes through the start gate 29 (gate 28) when the condition is met (in the jackpot waiting state), the waiting jackpot game starts and the predetermined jackpot prize opening ( A round game in which the first big prize opening 30) is opened (ball entry possible state) starts.

In the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3, in the game area below (downstream) of the gate 28 (starting gate 29), a first prize opening 30 is provided. A grand prize winning device 31 (also referred to as a "first variable ball entrance") is provided. The first big winning device 31 includes an opening/closing member 32, and opens and closes the first big winning opening 30 by operating the opening/closing member 32. The opening/closing member 32 has a generally rectangular (elongated plate) upper surface as a game ball passage, and in the closed state, the entrance of the first big prize opening 30 is closed and the game ball passes through the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32. It is possible to pass. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32 is formed in an inclined shape from the upstream side to the downstream side (from left to right in the drawing). As a result, when the opening/closing member 32 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flown down to the entrance of the first big winning opening 30 passes through the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32 without entering the first big winning opening 30. and flows downstream of the gaming area.

In addition, the opening/closing member 32 is driven by the first big prize opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5), and the opening/closing member 32 is retracted toward the back side of the game board 3, so that the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32 forming the game ball passage disappears. Thereby, when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open state, the game ball that has flown down to the entrance part of the first big winning opening 30 will enter the first big winning opening 30. In this way, the opening/closing member 32 that opens and closes the entrance of the first big prize opening 30 is a retractable opening/closing member, and when it is in the open state (opened), it smoothly moves the game balls flowing down to the first big prize. In addition to letting the ball enter the prize opening 30, when it is in the closed state (closed), the game ball flowing down can be guided in an arbitrary direction (second starting opening 21 to be described later) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. Incidentally, a game ball can enter the first big prize opening 30 only when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, the first big winning device 31 (first variable ball entry opening) is configured to switch between a ball entry impossible state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot enter and an entry state in which a game ball can enter, by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 32. It is possible to change to a ballable state (open state).

In the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) of the first big prize opening 30, there is a non-stick ball that does not change the ease of entry of game balls. A second fixed winning device 25 having a variable third starting port 26 is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the third starting port 26, a random number etc. for special symbol validity determination is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is established, the validity determination regarding the second special symbol ( As the second special symbol validity determination (second validity determination) is executed, the second special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the validity determination. In addition, the game ball passage is branched below (downstream) from the first big prize opening 30 (upper stage, lower stage), and the upper game ball passage where the third starting opening 26 is provided, and the second starting opening 31 and the second starting opening 31 A lower game ball passageway in which two major prize openings 35 are provided is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the game ball guided to the upper game ball passage enters the third starting port 26 by contacting the game nail 16 provided near the third starting port 26, etc. Otherwise, the ball flows downstream without entering the third starting port 26 and flows into the out port 34. In addition, the third starting port 26 is a fixed winning device (ball entry port) that allows balls to enter at any time, so if you hit the jackpot in a left-handed game (so-called first hit), you can play the first jackpot game with a right-handed ball. When executed in a game, the game ball is allowed to enter the third starting port 26 during the jackpot game (holding), and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the jackpot game ends.

In the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) of the first big prize opening 30, there is a variable variable that changes the ease with which the game ball enters. A variable prize winning device 22 (also referred to as a "variable starting port" or "variable starting port") is provided with a second starting port 21 of the formula. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, a random number for determining the validity of the special symbol, etc. is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is established, the determination of the validity of the first special symbol (the first 1 special symbol validity determination) is executed, the first special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the validity determination.

The variable prize winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 (also referred to as an "opening/closing member"), and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by operating the movable member 23. Through this opening/closing operation, the second starting port 21 can change from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which there is a higher possibility of a game ball entering than the first mode. be. In the first embodiment, a game ball can enter the second starting port 21 only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and a game ball cannot enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. There is. In addition, if the second starting port 21 is such that it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the ball when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when it is in the open state, the second starting port 21 is completely closed when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It does not have to be something that makes it impossible to enter the ball.

In addition, like the opening/closing member 32, the movable member 23 has a generally rectangular (elongated plate-like) game ball passage on its upper surface, and in the closed state closes the entrance of the second starting port 21 and closes the entrance of the second starting port 21. A game ball can pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the movable member 23 is formed in an inclined shape from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left in the paper). As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flown down to the entrance of the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 without entering the second starting port 21. Flows downstream of the gaming area.

Furthermore, the movable member 23 is driven by the second starting port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5), and the movable member 23 is retracted toward the back surface of the game board 3 (in a direction perpendicular to the game board surface), thereby forming a game ball passage. The movable member 23 disappears from the entrance portion of the second starting port 21. Thereby, when the movable member 23 is in the open state, the game ball that has flown down to the entrance portion of the second starting port 21 enters the second starting port 21. In this way, the movable member 23 that opens and closes the entrance of the second starting port 21 is a retractable opening/closing member similar to the opening/closing member 32, and when it is in the open state (opened), it can prevent the game balls flowing down. The ball enters the second starting port 21 smoothly, and when the ball is in the closed state (closed), the game ball flowing down is moved in any direction (second prize winning port 35 to be described later) by the inclined upper surface passage. lead to.

In this way, in a state where a game is played by firing a game ball into the right side area (right game area 3B), if the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the first special symbol validity determination is executed. The first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and when the game ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol validity determination is executed and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, in a state where a game is played by firing a game ball into the right side area (right game area 3B) (right-handed game), a game state where the game is mainly played mainly by the fluctuating display of the first special symbol (state B: low accuracy high A base state, a high-accuracy, high-base state), and a gaming state (state C: a high-accuracy, low-base state) in which the game is mainly played based on the fluctuating display of the second special symbol.

In addition, in the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3, and in the game area below (downstream) of the second starting opening 21, there is a second winning opening 35 provided with a second big winning opening 35. A grand prize winning device 36 (also referred to as a "second variable ball entrance") is provided. The second big prize winning device 36 includes an opening/closing member 37, and the second big winning opening 35 is opened and closed by the operation of the opening/closing member 37. Like the opening/closing member 32, the opening/closing member 37 has a generally rectangular (elongated plate-like) game ball passage on its upper surface, and in the closed state closes the entrance of the second grand prize opening 35 and closes the opening/closing member 37. A game ball can pass through the upper surface of the member 37. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening/closing member 37 is formed in an inclined shape from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left in the paper). As a result, when the opening/closing member 37 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flown down to the entrance of the second big winning opening 35 passes through the upper surface of the opening/closing member 37 without entering the second big winning opening 35. and flows downstream of the gaming area.

Further, the opening/closing member 37 is driven by the second grand prize opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5), and the opening/closing member 37 is retracted toward the back of the game board 3 (in a direction perpendicular to the game board surface), thereby forming a game ball passage. The opening/closing member 37 that was previously used is no longer present at the entrance of the second big prize opening 35. As a result, when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state, the game ball that has flown down to the entrance portion of the second big winning opening 35 enters the second big winning opening 35. In this way, the opening/closing member 37 that opens and closes the entrance of the second big prize opening 35 is a retractable opening/closing member similar to the opening/closing member 32, and when it is in the open state (opened), the game ball flowing down can be opened and closed. Smoothly enters the ball into the second grand prize opening 35, and when in the closed state (closed), the game ball flowing down is guided in an arbitrary direction (out port 34) by the inclined upper surface passage. becomes possible. Incidentally, a game ball can enter the second big prize opening 35 only when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state. In other words, the second big winning device 36 (second variable ball entry opening) operates between an entry impossible state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot enter and an entry state in which a game ball can enter, by the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 37. It is possible to change to a ballable state (open state).

Further, a plurality (three) of general ball entry holes 27 are provided in the gaming area below the left side area (left gaming area 3A) of the center decoration body 10 in the gaming area 3. The gaming area 3 where various ball entrances etc. are arranged in this way is divided into a left gaming area (first gaming area) 3A on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction, and a right gaming area (second gaming area) 3B on the right side. , can be divided into A batting style in which the game ball is launched so that it flows down the left gaming area 3A is called left-handed hitting, and a batting style in which the gaming ball is launched in such a way that it flows down in the right gaming area 3B is called right-handed batting. . In this pachinko game machine 1, in the normal state (low probability low base state, state A) at the start of the game, the player aims to hit the ball to the left into the first starting opening 20. That is, the normal state at the start of the game is a left-handed game in which the ball enters the first starting port 20 by left-handed batting (first special symbol validity determination).

On the other hand, if a jackpot is achieved in the judgment based on the ball entering the first starting hole 20 (first special symbol judgment), the jackpot game and after the end of the jackpot game (special game) (low probability high base state, high probability High base state or high-accuracy low base state) is when you hit the right hand and enter the gate 28, the first big winning hole 30, the second starting hole 21, the third starting hole 26, or the second big winning hole 35. It is a game where you aim at the ball. Specifically, when a jackpot is achieved in a left-handed game, the player first enters a jackpot standby state and becomes a right-handed game where the player aims to hit the ball into the gate 28. Next, when the ball enters the gate 28 (starting gate 29) in the jackpot standby state, the jackpot game starts, and becomes a right-handed game mainly aiming at the ball entering the first jackpot prize opening 30.

In addition, when the jackpot game ends and the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a low probability high base state or a high probability high base state (state B), the main gate 28 (general gate) and the second starting port 21 It is a right-handed game where you aim to hit the ball. On the other hand, when the jackpot game ends and the game state after the jackpot game becomes a high-accuracy/low-base state (state C), it becomes a right-handed game aiming at hitting the ball into the third starting hole 26 and the second big winning hole 35. Become. In other words, the low-accuracy, high-base state and the high-accuracy, high-base state (condition B) are right-handed games in which the ball enters the second starting port 21 (first special symbol correctness determination) by right-handed batting, and is a high-accuracy, high-accuracy game. The low base state (state C) is a right-handed game in which the ball enters the third starting port 26 by hitting the ball to the right (second special symbol validity determination). As a result, even in the same right-handed game, the main starting opening (object of special symbol validity determination) differs depending on the game state (state B or state C).

In addition, in the right gaming area 3B (second gaming area), a second out port 34b is provided upstream of the gate 28, and a second outlet 34b is provided to prevent game balls flowing into the gaming area downstream from the gate 28 of the right gaming area 3B. The amount can be adjusted (decreased). That is, the second out port 34b is installed upstream of all the ball entry ports installed in the right game area 3B, and the game nail provided near the second out port 34b allows the ball entry ports to be connected to each other. It is possible to adjust the rate of entry of game balls into the installation area (intrusion rate). Further, in the right gaming area 3B (second gaming area), a third out opening 34c is located downstream of the second starting opening 21 and upstream of the second big winning opening 35 which is the big winning opening for small winnings. has been established. This third out port 34c controls the rate of entry of game balls into the gaming area on the second big prize opening 35 side when a small hit occurs, that is, the rate of balls entering the second big prize opening 35 during a small winning game. It is adjustable. A game nail provided in the vicinity of the third out port 34c allows adjustment of the rate of entry of game balls into the second big prize opening 35 (intrusion rate).

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 20, second starting hole 21, first big winning hole 30, second big winning hole 35, and general ball entering hole 27, the respective ball entering holes A predetermined number of game balls (also referred to as "prize balls" or "gaming profits") are paid out (awarded). In this embodiment, the number of prize balls (amount of gaming profit) paid out based on balls entering the first big winning hole 30 is calculated from the number of prize balls paid out based on balls entering the second big winning hole 35. It is set higher than the number of pieces (amount of gaming profits). Specifically, the first grand prize opening 30 pays out 15 prize balls for each ball that enters, and the second grand prize hole 35 pays out 10 prize balls for each ball that enters. The prize ball shall be paid out.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged at the lower right portion of the game board 2. The main display 40 includes a first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display section) that displays a first special symbol in a variable manner and stops, and a second special symbol display that displays a second special symbol in a variable manner and stops. It includes a device 41b (second special symbol display section) and a normal symbol display device 42 (normal symbol display section) that displays normal symbols (also referred to as "specific identification information") in a variable and static manner. In addition, the main display 40 includes a first special symbol reservation display 43a that displays the stored number of validity determination information (first special symbol reservation) related to the first special symbol, and a first special symbol reservation display 43a that displays the number of memory determination information (first special symbol reservation) regarding the first special symbol; It includes a second special pattern holding display 43b that displays the number of memorized numbers of 2 special pattern holdings), and a normal pattern holding display 44 that displays the number of memory holdings of operation holding (normal pattern holding) of the normal pattern display 42. ing.

In addition, the main display 40 includes a hit indicator 48 that indicates that the result of the first special symbol validity determination or the second special symbol validity determination is a hit, and the first special symbol validity determination or the second special symbol validity determination. When the result is a hit, a round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed, a game status indicator 46 indicating that the probability variation function is activated, and a direction in which the game ball is launched, that is, to the right. A firing direction indicator 47 is included that indicates whether the ball should be hit to the left or to the left. The main display 40 also includes a fluctuation state display 49 that shows a fluctuation state of the first special symbol (c1), a fluctuation state of the second special symbol (c2), and a fluctuation state of the normal symbol (c3). There is. The various displays included in the main display 40 are display-controlled by a main control section, which will be described later.

The variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the third starting port 26. In addition, in the following explanation, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b may be collectively referred to as the special symbol display section 41. Further, the first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b may be collectively referred to as the special figure holding display section 43.

In the special symbol display section 41, the special symbol (identification information) is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time and then stopped, and the first starting port 20 and the second starting port are displayed by the special symbol (stop pattern) that is stopped (derived display). 21 or the result of the validity judgment (special symbol validity judgment, jackpot lottery) based on the ball entering the third starting port 26. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols based on the special symbol appropriateness determination. If the stopping symbol is a predetermined specific special symbol (specific identification information) (that is, if it is a jackpot symbol or a small winning symbol), the first symbol is released in an opening pattern according to the type of the specific special symbol that is stopped and displayed. A special game (a jackpot game, a small win game) in which the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35 is opened is played. In addition, the opening pattern of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30 and/or second big winning hole 35) in the special game will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "i to p", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the first special symbol validity determination. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol validity determination is the 15R first jackpot, three LEDs of "ijn" are turned on and the rest are turned off. Moreover, when the 4R second jackpot is achieved, four LEDs of "jnkl" are turned on and the rest are turned off. Furthermore, in the event of a failure, two LEDs of "lo" can be turned on and the rest can be turned off. Further, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol validity determination. As for the stop display mode, similarly to the first special symbol display 41b, different display modes are determined depending on the result of the second special symbol validity determination (big hit, small hit, miss). In addition, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed (before the derivation display), the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time, but the manner of the variable display is, for example, from left to right in a predetermined order. Each LED may be turned on so that the light repeatedly flows therethrough.

In this way, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are each composed of a plurality of LEDs (display sections), and while the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the first special symbol display 41a is A plurality of LEDs corresponding to the above are displayed by lighting (blinking) in a predetermined order, and when the variable time has elapsed, the first special symbol according to the result of the first special symbol validity determination is displayed according to the jackpot type (if one type, one type). ), the type of small hit (one type if there is one type), and the type of loss (one type if there is one type).

The fluctuating state indicator 49 includes a display part c1 (LEDc1), a display part c2 (LEDc2), and a display part c3 (LEDc3), and the display part c1 shows the fluctuating state of the first special symbol. The variable state of the second special symbol is indicated by c2, and the variable state of the normal symbol is indicated by the display portion c3. Specifically, the display section c1 that shows the fluctuation state of the first special symbol is composed of one LED (display section), which is a smaller number of LEDs (display section, display device) than the first special symbol display device 41a. has been done. During the variable display of the first special symbol, it is displayed blinking, and when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed, it is stopped and displayed in a display mode according to the result of the first special symbol validity determination. Specifically, in the case of a miss, the light is turned off and the display is stopped, and in the case of a jackpot, regardless of the type of jackpot, all the lights are lit in red and the display is stopped. Further, when the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped), the display is stopped with yellow lighting.

Therefore, the display part c1 is displayed blinking while the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, lit in yellow while the variable display is interrupted, lit in red while the jackpot symbol is stopped, and displayed in red while the winning symbol is stopped. is turned off (hidden). Thereby, by looking at the display part c1 of the fluctuation state display 49, it becomes possible to grasp the fluctuation state of the first special symbol (fluctuation, interruption, stop, validity determination result). In addition, since the fluctuating state display 49 has a simpler configuration (fewer indicators) than the first special symbol display 41a, it is difficult to grasp the jackpot type etc. in detail, but the fluctuating state It becomes possible to understand easily. Further, the fluctuating state indicator 49 (display section c1) functions as a second first special symbol indicator 41a. In addition, "suspension of variable display" is a process that can be performed when the result of the judgment of the other special symbol (second special symbol) executed at the same time becomes a jackpot, and the variable display is temporarily interrupted. However, after the cancellation condition is satisfied, the variable display is restarted.

In addition, the display section c2 that shows the fluctuation state of the second special symbol, like the display section c1, has one LED (display section, display device) that is a smaller number of LEDs (display section, display device) than the second special symbol display 41b. (display section). Then, during the variable display of the second special symbol, it is displayed blinking, and when the variable time of the second special symbol has elapsed, it is stopped and displayed in a display mode according to the result of the second special symbol validity determination. Specifically, in the case of a miss, the light is turned off and stopped, in the case of a jackpot, all lights are lit red and stopped, regardless of the jackpot type, and in the case of a small hit, all lights are lit green regardless of the jackpot type (small hit mode) Stop and display. Further, when the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped), the display is stopped with yellow lighting.

Therefore, the display part c2 is displayed blinking while the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, lit in yellow while the variable display is interrupted, lit in red while the jackpot symbol is stopped, and displayed in red when the small winning symbol is stopped. The inside is lit in green, and the light is off (not displayed) when the winning symbol is stopped. As a result, by looking at the display section c2 of the variation state display 49, it is possible to grasp the variation state of the second special symbol (fluctuation, interruption, stoppage, validity determination result). In addition, since the fluctuating state display 49 has a simpler configuration (fewer indicators) than the second special symbol display 41b, it is difficult to grasp the jackpot type etc. in detail, but the fluctuating state It becomes possible to understand easily. Further, the fluctuating state indicator 49 (display section c2) functions as a second special symbol indicator 41b.

The display mode (symbol) displayed on the display section c1 of the fluctuating state display 49 is also referred to as a "first state symbol" or "first sub-symbol." In addition, since the result of the first special symbol validity determination can be confirmed from the stopping state of the display section c1, it is also referred to as a "first confirmation symbol (also simply referred to as a "confirmation symbol"). Further, the display mode (symbol) displayed on the display section c2 is also referred to as a "second state symbol" or "second sub-symbol." In addition, since the result of the second special symbol validity determination can be confirmed from the stopping state of the display section c2, it is also referred to as a "second confirmation symbol (also simply referred to as a "confirmation symbol")." In addition, the first state symbol displays a variable display and a stop display in response to the variable display and stop display of the first special symbol, and the second state symbol displays a variable display and a stop display in response to the variable display and stop display of the second special symbol. Displays fluctuation and stoppage. Therefore, if the result of the special symbol validity judgment for the first special symbol is a loss, the first state symbol will be turned off (missing mode) and will stop displaying, and if it is a jackpot, all lights will be lit in red regardless of the jackpot type (jackpot mode). Stop and display. The same holds true for the relationship between the second special symbol and the second state symbol.

In addition, the display part c3 that shows the fluctuating state of the normal symbol is one LED (display part), which is a smaller number of LEDs (display part, indicator) than the normal symbol display 42, like the display part c1. It is configured. Then, while the normal symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, they are displayed blinking, and when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed, they are stopped and displayed in a display mode according to the result of the normal symbol validity determination. Specifically, in the case of a miss, the light is turned off to indicate a stop, and in the case of a hit, the light is lit in red to indicate a stop, regardless of the type of hit. In addition, when the fluctuating display of normal symbols is interrupted (temporarily stopped), the stop display is displayed with yellow lighting.

Therefore, the display part c3 is displayed blinking while the normal symbol is being fluctuated, lit in yellow while the fluctuating display is interrupted, lit in red while the winning symbol is stopped, and turned off while the losing symbol is being stopped. (hidden). As a result, by looking at the display section c3 of the variation state display 49, it is possible to grasp the variation state of the normal symbol (fluctuating, interrupted, stopped, and the result of the judgment). In addition, since the fluctuating state display 49 has a simpler configuration (fewer indicators) than the normal symbol display 42, it is difficult to grasp the hit type in detail, but the fluctuating state can be easily displayed. It becomes possible to understand the

The display mode (symbol) displayed on the display section c3 of the variable state display 49 is also referred to as a "first state normal symbol" or "first sub normal symbol." In addition, the first state normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner and in a stopped state in response to the variable display and stopped display of the normal symbols. Therefore, if the result of the determination of whether the normal symbol is a win or not, the display is stopped and turned off (missing mode), and if it is a win, the display is stopped and lit in red (win mode) regardless of the type of win.

In this embodiment, a special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 41a, second special symbol display device 41b) and a fluctuation state display device 49 are provided, and the fluctuation state of the special symbol can be grasped by either of them. , If any of the LEDs of the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 41a, second special symbol display device 41b) that has a large number of LEDs that can grasp the fluctuation state in detail is broken (damage, disconnection, etc.) However, the fluctuation state indicator 49 makes it possible to roughly grasp the fluctuation state. The same applies to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable state display 49. Further, in this embodiment, both the special symbol display devices (the first special symbol display device 41a, the second special symbol display device 41b) and the fluctuation state display device 49 are display-controlled by the main control unit.

Here, among the stop display modes of special symbols and performance symbols (display results of variable displays), the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol validity judgment is a hit (big hit or small hit) is referred to as the "win mode". ”, “specific mode”, “specific display mode”, or “specific display result”, and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of special symbol validity judgment is a failure is referred to as “missing mode”, “non-specific mode” , also referred to as "non-specific display mode" or "non-specific display result." In addition, the stop display mode that corresponds to the case where the result of the special symbol validity determination is a jackpot is also referred to as the "jackpot mode" or "jackpot symbol", and the stop display format that corresponds to the case where the result of the special symbol validity determination is a small hit. This is also referred to as the "small winning pattern" or "small winning pattern." Furthermore, it refers to any or all of the image display device, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display section), the second special symbol display 41b (second special symbol display section), and the special symbol display section 41. It is also called "variable display means" or "identification information display means."

In this pachinko game machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20, second starting port 21, or third starting port 26, various kinds of random numbers for determining the validity of special symbols etc. are generated based on the entering of the ball. Information (also referred to as "acquisition information") is acquired, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage section 85 formed in the RAM of the main control section 80. Specifically, if the information is acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, it is stored as the first special pattern holding (also referred to as "first acquired information"). If the information is stored in the section 85a and acquired based on the ball entering the third starting port 26, it is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage section 85b as a second special symbol reservation (also referred to as "second acquired information"). be done. An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage section 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. These first special figure reservation storage section 85a and second special figure reservation storage section 85b are also referred to as "first acquisition information storage means" and "second acquisition information storage means", respectively, and collectively as "acquisition information storage means". .

The special symbol reservation stored in the special symbol reservation storage section 85 is consumed when the special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner based on the special symbol reservation. Extinguishing the special symbol reservation means determining the special symbol propriety judgment random number etc. corresponding to the special symbol reservation, and executing a variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, if the variable display of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, second starting port 21, or third starting port 26 cannot be executed immediately at the time of the ball entering. That is, during execution of variable display of each special symbol or execution of a special game based on any special symbol validity determination, the special symbol validity determination for the entered ball is limited to a predetermined number (4 for each). It is now possible to reserve (reserve) the rights to.

The number of such special figure reservations is displayed on the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b. Specifically, the first special figure reservation display 43a is composed of two LEDs "uv", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of first special figures reserved, the first special figure reservation display 43a This displays the number of pending items. For example, when the number of reservations is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "u□v□" (for example, □: off, ●: lit in red, ▲: lit in green), and the number of pending is 1. In the case of ``u□v●'', the display mode can be such that the LED for u is turned off and the LED for v is turned on in red. Furthermore, when the number of reservations is 2, the display mode may be such that the LED for u is lit in red and the LED for v is turned off, such as "u●v□". Furthermore, when the number of reservations is 3, the display mode can be such that both LEDs are lit in red, such as "u●v●". Further, when the number of reservations is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be lit in green as a display mode such as "u▲v▲". In addition, the second special figure holding display 43b is composed of two LEDs "wx", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of second special figures holding, the second special figure holding display 43b It displays numbers. For example, if the number of reservations is 0, the display format is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "w□x□" (for example, □: off, ●: red on, ▲: green on), and the number of reservations is 1 to 4 is also defined in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

The variable display of the normal symbols is performed based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 (detected by the gate sensor 28a). The normal symbol display device 42 displays the normal symbols in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, then stops displaying them, and uses the stopped and displayed normal symbols (stopped symbols) to indicate the result of the normal symbol validity determination based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. inform. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the normal symbol validity determination. If the stopped and displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (hit normal symbol), an auxiliary game ("specific game") in which the second starting port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current game state. ) is carried out. Further, the means (main control section) for executing the auxiliary game (specific game) is also referred to as auxiliary game execution means (specific game execution means). Note that the opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs "st", and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol validity determination depending on the lighting mode. It is. For example, if the determination result is a win, a normal winning symbol with both LEDs lit is stopped and displayed, such as "s■t■" (for example, ■: lit, □: turned off). Further, if the determination result is a failure, a normal failure symbol such as "s□t■" in which only the t LED is lit is displayed. Before the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time. The mode of the variable display is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs alternately turn on and off.

When a game ball passes through the gate 28, this pachinko gaming machine 1 acquires various information (also referred to as "acquired information") such as a random number for determining the validity of normal symbols based on the passing of the game ball, and acquires various kinds of acquired information. is temporarily stored as a general pattern reservation in the general pattern reservation storage section 86 formed in the RAM of the main control section 80. An upper limit is set for the number of ordinary figures that can be stored in the ordinary figures reservation storage section 86, and the upper limit in the first embodiment is four. The general symbol reservation stored in the ordinary symbol reservation storage section 86 is consumed when the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the ordinary symbol reservation becomes possible. The extinguishing of a normal symbol reservation means to determine the random number for normal symbol propriety determination corresponding to the ordinary symbol reservation, and to execute a fluctuating display of the ordinary symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the fluctuating display of the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be executed immediately at the time of the passage, that is, when the fluctuating display of the regular symbols is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed. can reserve (reserve) the right to judge the validity of normal symbols for the passage of a predetermined number of symbols.

This number of ordinary drawings on hold is displayed on the ordinary drawings holding display 44. Specifically, the common picture reservation display 44 is composed of two LEDs "qr", and displays the number of common pictures pending by lighting the LEDs according to the number of common pictures pending. For example, when the number of reservations is 0, the display format is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "q□r□" (for example, □: off, ●: lit in red, ▲: lit in green), and the number of pending is 1. In the case of "q□r●", the display mode can be such that the q LED is turned off and the r LED is turned on in red. Further, the number of reservations 2 to 4 is also determined in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIGS. 2 and 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a main control board 80 (a "main control section" or "main control section") that controls gaming profits such as special symbol validity determination, normal symbol validity determination, and gaming state transition. (also referred to as "gaming control unit"), sub-control board 90 (also referred to as "sub-control unit", "sub-control unit", or "performance control unit") that controls the production executed as the game progresses, game ball A payout control board 110 (also referred to as a "payout control unit") that performs control regarding payouts, the effect symbols 8 displayed on the image display device 7, the symbols displayed on the effect display 102, the third effect pending display 103a, It also includes an image control board 100 (image control unit) that controls the display of the fourth effect pending display 103b, etc. As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case housing a main control board 80 is provided approximately at the center of the rear side (back side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and above the main control board case, An image control board storage case is provided that stores the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100, and a sub-control board storage case that stores the sub-control board 90 is provided on the image control board storage case. It is provided. Further, a payout control board case for storing a payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power board case for storing a power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

A one-chip microcomputer for game control (hereinafter referred to as "microcomputer for game control") 81 is mounted on the main control board 80 and controls the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data (information) to and from other boards etc. via an input/output circuit 87 (I/O port section). The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcomputer 81. Further, the ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-mentioned special pattern holding storage section 85 (first special drawing holding storage section 85a and second special drawing holding storage section 85b) and regular drawing holding storage section 86. .

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88. Therefore, signals are input from each sensor to the main control board 80, and signals are output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a third starting port sensor 26a, a gate sensor 28a (starting gate sensor 29a), a first big winning port sensor 30a, and a second starting port sensor 20a. A big prize opening sensor 35a and a general ball entrance sensor 27a are connected. These various sensors are also referred to as "detection means".

The first starting port sensor 20a is provided in the first starting port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided within the second starting port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second starting port 21. The third starting port sensor 26a is provided within the third starting port 26 and detects a game ball that has entered the third starting port 26. The gate sensor 28a (starting gate sensor 29a) is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first big winning hole sensor 30a is provided in the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first big winning hole 30. The second big winning hole sensor 35a is provided in the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 35. The general ball entrance sensor 27a is provided in each general ball entrance 27 to detect a game ball that has entered the general ball entrance 27.

In addition, as the solenoids, the second starting port solenoid 24, the first big winning port solenoid 33, and the second big winning port solenoid 38 are connected. The second starting port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable prize winning device 22. The first big prize opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31. The second big prize opening solenoid 38 is for driving the opening/closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36. Furthermore, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol pending display 43a, a second special symbol pending display 43b, and a normal symbol display 42. A figure holding display 44, a fluctuation state display 49, a round display 45, a game state display 46, a firing direction display 47, and a winning display 48 are connected. That is, display control of these main display devices 40 is performed by a game control microcomputer 81 (main control section 80).

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for monitoring payout. A payout device 120 that pays out prize balls and rental balls, and a card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and a launch device 112 is connected to the payout control board 110 via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a "launch control unit"). is connected. Firing device 112 includes firing handle 60 (see FIG. 1). The card unit 135 is installed adjacent to one end of the pachinko machine 1 (usually on the left side of the paper in FIG. This system enables ball lending based on information stored in a value storage medium, etc.

The payout control board 110 has a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as a "payout control microcomputer") that controls the payout of game balls of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores programs for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 controls the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input/output circuit 117. It is driven to pay out prize balls or pay out rental balls. The game balls that are paid out are detected by payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. Note that when the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the firing device 112, the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the firing handle 60, and the firing volume 115 changes to the position of the firing handle 60. Detects the amount of rotation. Then, the firing motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a unidirectional (one-way) communication connection that allows only the transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a communication direction regulating means. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control board 90 is equipped with a performance control one-chip microcomputer 91 (``performance control microcomputer'') that controls the performance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The production control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores programs for controlling the game production as the game progresses, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. There is. The production control microcomputer 91 sends and receives data to and from other boards etc. via the input/output circuit 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built in the production control microcomputer 91. Further, the ROM may be externally attached.

An image control board 100, an audio control board 106, and a lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub-control board 90. The production control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 controls the CPU (VDP) of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 ("image control microcomputer") of the image control board 100 based on the command received from the main control board 80. , the display of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, the third image display device 72, the effect display 102, the third effect pending display 103a, and the fourth effect pending display 103b Let control take place. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for expanding image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 stores still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device, specifically characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including performance patterns, reserved patterns, etc.), Image data such as a background image is stored. The CPU (VDP) of the image control board 100 reads image data from the ROM based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 91. Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

The effect display 102 consists of two LEDs, one of which performs a variable display and a stop display in accordance with the variable display and stop display of the first special symbol, and the other LED performs a variable display of the second special symbol. A display mode in which a variable display and a stop display are performed in accordance with the and stop display, and the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (result of special symbol validity determination) is shown by lighting/extinguishing or color of the corresponding LED. Stop and display. Similarly, the third effect pending display 103a and the fourth effect pending display 103b are each made up of two LEDs. Then, depending on the lighting/extinguishing of the two LEDs or the combination of colors, the third performance reservation display 103a displays the number of reservations displayed in the first performance reservation display area 9c and the first special symbol reservation display 43a. The display is controlled in a display mode that shows the same number of pending items as the number of pending items. In addition, the fourth performance reservation display 103b is controlled to display the same number of reservations as the number of reservations displayed in the second performance reservation display area 9d and the number of reservations displayed on the second special figure reservation display 43b. Ru.

The character design can be displayed on a part or substantially the entire display screen 7a (performance pattern display section), or the movable decorative member 14 can be moved in front of the display screen 7a (performance pattern display section) to display the character pattern on the display screen 7a (performance pattern display section). By covering part or almost the entire part of the part), part or all of the effect pattern 8, the first effect pending display part 9c, or the second effect pending display part 9d may become invisible. be. Even in such a covered state, in order to be able to reliably check the fluctuating display and stop display of the performance symbols, the number of pending items, etc., these performance display devices 102, the third performance reservation display device 103a, And, a fourth effect pending display 103b is provided. The display mode of the effect display 102, the third effect pending display 103a, and the fourth effect pending display 103b is such that the display is always visible without being obstructed by the movement of the movable decorative member 14. It has become. Furthermore, a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided in place of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

Furthermore, the performance control microcomputer 91 outputs audio, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as audio output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may be caused to execute voice control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute audio control. Furthermore, in this case, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 also generates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting/extinguishing, lighting color, etc.) that determines the lighting mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 based on commands received from the main control board 80. , also referred to as lamp data) from data stored in the ROM, and controls the lighting of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107.

Furthermore, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Although only a portion of the movable decorative member 14 is visible in FIG. 1, it is a movable so-called gimmick (movable member) provided on the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines operation pattern data (also referred to as "drive data") for operating the movable decoration member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, The motion of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the determined motion pattern data. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may control the lighting of the lamp and the operation of the movable decorative member 14. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and data regarding the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

Further, the sub-control board 90 includes a first performance button detection switch 63c and a first performance button detection switch 63c that detects that the first performance button 63a or the second performance button 63b (see FIG. 1) is operated (pressed, rotated, pulled, etc.). 2 production button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when a player performs a predetermined input operation on the first performance button 63a or the second performance button 63b, a signal is outputted to the sub-control board 90 from the corresponding performance button detection switch.

Next, control related to special symbol validity determination in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be explained. The results of special symbol validity judgment include "big hit", "small hit", and "miss". At the time of "jackpot", the "jackpot symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section 41. The jackpot symbol (specific display result) is predetermined according to the type of jackpot described later (see FIG. 6). In addition, when there is a "small win", the "small win symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section 41. Moreover, when it is a "miss", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display section 41. When a jackpot or small win is determined, a "special game" is executed in which the first big prize opening 30 or the second big prize opening 35 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed. . A special game that is executed as a jackpot is called a "jackpot game," and a special game that is executed as a small win is called a "small win game."

There are a plurality of types of hits, and depending on the result (specific result) of special symbol validity determination, the winning type corresponding to the result (specific result) is executed. That is, depending on whether the result of the special symbol validity judgment is the first specific result, the second specific result, the third specific result, or another specific result, different hit types (jackpot , including small winnings). In addition, the special games to be executed may differ depending on the winning type, and the amount of gaming profits that can be earned by the special games may differ, and the gaming state after the special game ends may differ. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the types of winnings include "15R (round) 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "4R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot", and "15R 1st jackpot". 5 jackpot," "2R 6th jackpot," and "2R 7th jackpot." In "15R 1st jackpot" and "15R 5th jackpot", the number of openings (number of rounds) of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30) is 15 times. In addition, for "4R 2nd jackpot", "4R 3rd jackpot", and "4R 4th jackpot", the number of openings (number of rounds) of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30) is 4 times. In the "2R 6th jackpot" and the "2R 7th jackpot", the number of openings (number of rounds) of the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30) is two. In this way, in all jackpots, the first big prize opening 30 is opened and the second big prize opening 35 is not opened. For this reason, the first big winning hole 30 is also referred to as a "big winning hole for jackpot (variable ball entry hole for jackpot)".

In addition, "15R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "4R 3rd jackpot", "15R 5th jackpot", and "2R 6th jackpot" are the game status after the end of the jackpot game. , to shift to a high probability state (activate the probability variation function), which will be described later. Therefore, these five types of jackpots are also called "probable jackpots (high probability jackpots)." This high probability state (variable probability function) continues until the next jackpot occurs. In addition, "4R 4th jackpot" and "2R 7th jackpot" shift the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game to a low probability state (described later) (the probability change function is not activated). Therefore, these two types of jackpots are also called "low probability jackpots (low probability jackpots, normal jackpots)".

In addition, for "15R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot" and "15R 5th jackpot", after the end of the jackpot game, "2nd special symbol time saving" which sets the fluctuation time of the 2nd special symbol to a short time function" and does not activate the high base generation function. As a result, the gaming state after the end of these jackpot games becomes a high probability low base state (state C). This high-probability-low base state continues until the next jackpot occurs. In addition, in this high-accuracy low base state, the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol is longer than the low-accuracy low base state, the low-accuracy high base state, and the high-accuracy high base state. It is set. In particular, the variation time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is negative is set to be a long time (see FIG. 9).

In addition, the gameplay in the high-accuracy, low-base state (state C) will be described in detail later, but by playing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B where various ball entrances are arranged as described above, the third start Let the ball enter the hole 26. Then, a second special symbol validity judgment is performed to generate a small hit, and it is a period in which it is possible to increase the number of game balls in the period between the previous jackpot and the next jackpot (during the jackpot). In addition, by causing small hits to occur frequently in this high-accuracy/low-base state between jackpots, it is possible to expect a large number of game balls to be acquired in a short period of time due to the small hits. In other words, it is a period that is advantageous for the player and is a period in which it is possible to increase interest in the game.

Furthermore, for the "4R 4th jackpot" and the "2R 7th jackpot", the "first special symbol time saving function" and the "high base generation function" are activated after the jackpot game ends. Due to the activation of the first special symbol time saving function, the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol is shorter than when the first special symbol time saving function is not activated (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy low base state) set to time. In addition, since the second special symbol time saving function is not activated, the variation time of the second special symbol is longer than the variation time of the first special symbol. As a result, the gaming state after the end of these jackpot games becomes a low probability high base state. In the case of "4R 4th jackpot" and "2R 7th jackpot", the low probability high base state ends based on the occurrence of the next jackpot or the 100th execution of the variable display of the special symbol. . When the variable display of the special symbol ends after being executed 100 times, the gaming state is set to a low probability low base state (normal state). In addition, as will be described in detail later, in the low-accuracy, high-base state, by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B where various ball entrances are arranged as described above, the first special symbol validity judgment is performed, and the next This is the period during which players play games in hopes of hitting the jackpot.

Furthermore, for the "4R third jackpot" and the "2R sixth jackpot", the "first special symbol time saving function" and "high base generation function" are activated after the jackpot game ends. In addition, since the second special symbol time saving function is not activated, the variation time of the second special symbol is longer than the variation time of the first special symbol. As a result, the gaming state after the end of these jackpot games becomes a high probability high base state. In the case of "4R 3rd jackpot" and "2R 6th jackpot", the "1st special symbol time saving function" and the "high base generation function" continue until the next jackpot occurs. Also, as mentioned above, the "probability change function" continues until the next jackpot occurs. That is, in the case of "4R 3rd jackpot" and "2R 6th jackpot", after the end of the jackpot game, the high probability high base state (first special symbol time saving state) is set until the next jackpot occurs.

In the high-accuracy, high-base state, similarly to the low-accuracy, high-base state, by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B, the first special symbol validity judgment is performed, and the game is played in anticipation of the occurrence of the next jackpot. As mentioned above, the high-accuracy/low-base state is a period in which small hits occur frequently while executing the second special symbol validity judgment by right-handed games, and a large number of game balls are generated in a short period of time due to small hits. This is an advantageous period for players, as they can expect to win. Note that there are more game balls that can be obtained in the high-accuracy, low-base state than in the high-accuracy, high-base state.

In addition, the high certainty high base state after the end of the jackpot game (4R 3rd jackpot game) related to "4R 3rd jackpot" and the low base state after the end of the jackpot game (4R 4th jackpot game) related to "4R 4th jackpot" By executing a common game performance (first game performance: background, game mode, character pattern, reach performance, etc.) in the sure-high base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state he is in. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set as state B, and a common variation pattern determination table is used to determine a variation pattern. As a result, both gaming states are set to non-notifying states in which the gaming state (high-probability high-base state or low-probability high-base state) is not notified (recognition is difficult).

If the type of jackpot was "4R 3rd jackpot", even after the special symbol was displayed 100 times, the high-precision, high-base state continued, resulting in a "4R 4th jackpot". In this case, after the special symbols have been displayed 100 times, the gaming state becomes a low probability low base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player). Therefore, in this non-notification state, the player plays the game with the expectation that the high-accuracy-high base state will continue even after 100 games have passed, increasing his interest in the game, no matter which gaming state he is in. In addition, in the low-accuracy, high-base state or the high-accuracy, high-base state, that is, the high base state, the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls he has much (the rate of decrease in the number of balls he has is slower than in the low-accuracy, low-base state). It can be performed.

Similarly, the high certainty high base state after the end of the jackpot game (2R 6th jackpot game) related to "2R 6th jackpot" and the end of the jackpot game (2R 7th jackpot game) related to "2R 7th jackpot" By executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the low-accuracy/high-base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state he/she is in. do. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set as state B, and a common variation pattern determination table is used to determine a variation pattern. As a result, both gaming states are set to non-notifying states in which the gaming state (high-probability high-base state or low-probability high-base state) is not notified (recognition is difficult).

If the type of jackpot was "2R 6th jackpot", even after the special symbol was displayed 100 times, the high-precision, high-base state continued, resulting in "2R 7th jackpot". In this case, after the special symbols have been displayed 100 times, the gaming state becomes a low probability low base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player). Therefore, in this non-notification state, the player plays the game with the expectation that the high-accuracy-high base state will continue even after 100 games have passed, increasing his interest in the game, no matter which gaming state he is in.

Here, the respective jackpots of "4R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot", "2R 6th jackpot", and "2R 7th jackpot" are jackpots in which the gaming state after the jackpot game is in state B. The symbols are also referred to as "first specific display results", and "15R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", and "15R 5th jackpot" are jackpots where the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is state C. Each jackpot symbol is also referred to as a "second specific display result."

In addition, for small wins that may occur as a result of the second special symbol validity determination, the number of openings of the big winning hole (second big winning hole 35) is 6 times, and compared to other jackpots, the number of times the big winning hole (second big winning hole 35) is opened is 1 (and (total) opening time is also set short. Specifically, the opening is performed six times for 0.3 seconds, for a total of 1.8 seconds. Therefore, compared to jackpot games (for example, 15R first jackpot game, 4R fourth jackpot game, etc.), the number of game balls that can be acquired in one small win game is set to be smaller. However, by generating small wins a plurality of times (many times) in a high probability/low base state between jackpots, it is possible to execute a plurality of small win games and obtain more game balls. In addition, in the case of a small win, the second big prize opening 35 is all opened, and the first big prize opening 30 is not opened. For this reason, the second large prize opening 35 is also referred to as a "small winning large winning opening (small winning variable ball entrance)". In addition, in the small winning game (small winning game), unlike the big winning (big winning game), the number of times the big winning opening is opened is not called the number of rounds, but simply the number of openings. In addition, the probability variable function will not be activated based on the occurrence of a small hit, and if the gaming state when a small hit occurs is a high probability state, it will be kept in a high probability state even after the small hit game ends, and when a small hit occurs, If the game state is a low probability state, it will remain a low probability state even after the small winning game ends. Similarly, the time saving function and high base generation function of the second special symbol are not activated based on the occurrence of a small hit.

In addition, the distribution probability to each jackpot in the judgment of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is 20% for the 15R first jackpot, 10% for the 4R second jackpot, 35% for the 4R third jackpot, and 35% for the 4R third jackpot. 4 jackpots are 35%. On the other hand, the jackpot in the judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 50% for the 15R 5th jackpot, 15% for the 2R 6th jackpot, and 35% for the 2R 7th jackpot. In other words, if a jackpot is achieved by the judgment based on the ball entering the third starting port 26 whose fluctuation frequency has been improved by the operation of the second special symbol time saving function described later (second special symbol judgment), 15R It becomes a jackpot (15R 5th jackpot) and a large amount of game balls can be obtained in a short period of time. In this way, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, rather than hitting the jackpot in the judgment (first special symbol judgment) made when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, 3. It is more likely that it will be advantageous for the player (to obtain a large amount of game balls) if the game ball enters the starting hole 26 and the game ball hits the jackpot in the judgment (second special symbol judgment). It is set to be. In addition, the player plays the game in anticipation of the occurrence of the 15R fifth jackpot and the occurrence of a high-precision low-base state in which the number of game balls can be increased by a small win.

Here, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the determination of whether it is a jackpot, a small hit, or a miss is made based on a "random number for special symbol validity determination (also referred to as "properness determination information")", and when a jackpot is achieved, The determination of the jackpot type is performed based on the "random number for jackpot type determination (also referred to as "random number for symbol determination" or "information for symbol determination")". Note that the result of the first special symbol validity determination does not include a small hit. As shown in FIG. 7(A), the random number for determining the validity of the special symbol takes a value in the range from 0 to 629. The random number for determining the jackpot type takes a value in the range from 0 to 99. In addition, the random numbers (acquisition information) acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20, the second starting port 21, or the third starting port 26 include a random number for determining the validity of a special symbol and a random number for determining the jackpot type. In addition, there is "fluctuation pattern random number (also referred to as "fluctuation pattern information")." Further, the variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) including a variation time of the special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random number takes values in the range from 0 to 198. Furthermore, the random numbers obtained based on passage through the gate 28 include the random numbers for normal symbol validity determination shown in FIG. 7(B). The normal symbol validity determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to perform the auxiliary game that opens the second starting port 21 (normal symbol validity determination). Normal symbol random numbers take values in the range from 0 to 240.

Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be explained. The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a probability variation function (probability variation function) for special symbols and ordinary symbols, a variation time shortening function for special symbols and ordinary symbols, and an opening extension function of the second starting port 21, which are either in an operating state or in a non-operating state. It has a plurality of gaming states depending on the combination that becomes the operating state. Regarding the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol), a state in which the probability variation function is activated is referred to as a "high probability state", and a state in which it is not activated is referred to as a "low probability state". In the high probability state (jackpot probability: 1/63), the probability of being judged as a jackpot in the special symbol validity determination is higher than in the low probability state (jackpot probability: 1/315). In other words, in a low probability state, a jackpot determination table for a low probability state is used to determine whether the jackpot is determined, but in a high probability state, a jackpot determination is performed using a jackpot determination table for a high probability state in which there are many values of random numbers for determining the special symbols that are determined to be a jackpot. Judgment is made using the table (see FIG. 8(A)). In other words, when the special symbol probability variation function is activated, the probability that the result of the special symbol variation display will be a jackpot (the stopped symbol will become a jackpot symbol) becomes higher than when it is not activated. Note that the means (main control unit) for setting a high probability or a low probability as the probability (jackpot probability) for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is referred to as a "probability setting means".

Further, the state in which the variable time reduction function is activated for the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is referred to as a "time reduction state", and the state in which it is not activated is referred to as a "non-time reduction state". In the time saving state, the average value of the variation time of the special symbols (time from the start of variable display to the time of final display) is shorter than the average value of the variation time of the special symbols in the non-time saving state. That is, in the time-saving state, a variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern table that is determined so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often than in a non-time-saving state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the reserved special symbols are consumed becomes faster, and effective ball entry into the starting slot (balls that can be stored as reserved special symbols) is more likely to occur. Therefore, players can aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, since the length of the variation time of the second special symbol is particularly related to the advantage or disadvantage of the player, it is set as a "second special symbol time saving function" as shown in FIG. There is. State A (low accuracy low base state) and state B (low accuracy high base state) shown in FIG. , high certainty, high base state). In state A (low probability low base state), when the player plays a right-handed game and enters the game ball into the third starting port 26, the second special symbol validity determination is executed, and the second special symbol displays fluctuations. However, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in state A is set to a very long time (600 seconds for a miss, 110 seconds for a jackpot, and 1000 seconds for a small win), the game cannot proceed smoothly (in such a state (also referred to as the "first condition state"). In addition, since it is in a low base state (first game state), it is impossible or difficult for the ball to enter the second starting port 21.

Therefore, even if the player plays a right-handed game in state A, it is difficult for the player to acquire a large amount of game balls. Therefore, in state A, the game proceeds with a left-handed game, aiming at the first starting opening 20 in which the special symbol variation time is set to an appropriate length. On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a gaming machine that can simultaneously (parallelly) execute variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol. Even if the second special symbol is erroneously displayed in a variable manner in state A, the player can enter the game ball into the first starting port 20 without waiting for the variable display of the second special symbol to end. , it is possible to display the first special symbol in a variable manner.

On the other hand, in state B (low-probability high base state, high-probability high base state), the right-handed game is performed because the player is in the high base state (second game state) and the first special symbol time saving function is activated. This allows the ball to enter both the second starting port 21 and the third starting port 26 which are in the open state. In state B, like state A, the second special symbol time saving function is not activated. Therefore, when the ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol validity judgment is executed and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, but the variation time of the second special symbol is a very long time. (600 seconds for a miss, 110 seconds for a jackpot, and 1000 seconds for a small win), so the game cannot proceed smoothly. However, when the ball enters the second starting port 21, the first special symbol validity determination is executed and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the first special symbol time-saving function is activated to enter the first special symbol time-saving state, and the first special symbol validity determination is executed more frequently than in state A, allowing the game to proceed smoothly.

In addition, as a state where the second special symbol validity determination is the main, state C (high accuracy low base state) shown in FIG. 9 is provided. In state C (high accuracy low base state), the second special symbol time saving function is activated, so by playing a right-handed game, it is possible to play a game aiming at the ball entering the third starting port 26. becomes. When the ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol validity determination is executed and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, due to the operation of the second special symbol time-saving function, the second special symbol time-saving state is entered, and the second special symbol validity judgment is executed more frequently than in states A and B, allowing the game to proceed smoothly. I can do it. Thereby, it becomes possible to execute the second special symbol validity determination which is more advantageous than the first special symbol validity determination.

In state C, when the ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the first special symbol validity determination is executed and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Since the symbol fluctuation time is set to a very long time (600 seconds for a loss and 110 seconds for a jackpot), the game cannot proceed smoothly. Therefore, in state C, even if the ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, or if there is a pending memory related to the first special symbol correctness determination, the second special symbol correctness determination is It is possible to reduce as much as possible the possibility that an unfavorable first special symbol validity determination will be executed.

In this way, states B and C are both states in which a right-handed game is performed, but in state B, like state C, the game state is a game state in which the first special symbol validity determination is mainly performed, and state C Then, a game state is entered in which the second special symbol validity determination is mainly performed. This results in a jackpot in the normal state of left-handed games (low probability low base state, state A), and after shifting to right-handed games, in the so-called consecutive winning period (right-handed state), the first special symbol validity judgment is performed. A transition is made between a game state in which the main character is played and a game state in which the second special symbol is judged as the main character, thereby diversifying the gameplay. In addition, since there are different types of jackpots (jackpot games) that can occur in the game state in which the first special symbol validity determination is mainly performed and the game state in which the second special symbol validity determination is mainly performed, there are different types of jackpots (jackpot games) that can occur. While the game continues, different jackpots (jackpot games) are generated by shifting these gaming states. This makes it possible to prevent players from getting bored with the game and increase their interest in the game.

In addition, when the second special symbol time saving function is activated, that is, in state C shown in FIG. 9 (such a state is also referred to as "second condition state"), as shown in FIG. Since the variation time of the special symbols is short, by playing right-handed games, the player can smoothly play the game (second special symbol validity judgment, second special symbol judgment, 2 special symbol variation game) can be executed. In addition, in this embodiment, the first special symbol time-saving function is not activated during the period in which the second special symbol time-saving function is activated (the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is made longer than in the normal state). However, the first special symbol time saving function may be activated. Further, in state B, the number of balls held is maintained or slightly decreased, and in state C, it is assumed that the number of balls is increased.

The probability variation function and the variation time reduction function (first special symbol time reduction function or second special symbol time reduction function) regarding the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) operate simultaneously. The probability variation function and variation time reduction function for normal symbols operate in synchronization with the high base generation function. In other words, the normal symbol probability fluctuation function and fluctuation time shortening function operate when the gaming state is a high base state (low probability high base state, high probability high base state), and when the gaming state is low base state (low probability low base state, high probability does not operate in low base conditions). Therefore, in the high base state (state B), the probability of winning in the normal symbol validity determination is higher than in the low base state (also referred to as the "normal symbol high probability state"). In other words, in the high base state (state B), the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) that is determined to be a hit is higher than the normal symbol hit determination table used in the low base state (states A, C). A normal symbol correctness determination (normal symbol determination) is performed using the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 8(C)). In other words, when the probability variation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the result of the variable display of the normal symbol will be a hit (the stopped symbol will become a normal winning symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated. .

Also, in the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the low base state. In the first embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds in the low base state, but 1 second in the high base state (see FIG. 8(E)). Furthermore, in the high base state, the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the low base state. In other words, the opening time extension function of the variable prize winning device 22 is operating. Specifically, when the result of normal symbol validity determination is a hit in the low base state, the opening/closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs an opening operation of 0.9 seconds three times (opening time: 2.7 seconds), and then opens. During the period of operation, the second starting port is in an open state. In addition, when the result of normal symbol validity determination is a hit in the high base state, the opening/closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs one opening operation for 6.0 seconds (opening time: 6.0 seconds). . Further, the closing time between opening operations in the low base state is 0.1 seconds. In this embodiment, the number of times the opening/closing member 37 is opened is different between the low base state and the high base state, but the number of times the opening and closing member 37 is opened may be the same. For example, the opening operation in the low base state may be one opening of 2.7 seconds, or the opening operation in the high base state may be three openings of 2.0 seconds. Further, the opening operation in the high base state may be opened six times for 1.0 seconds, which may be greater than the number of openings in the low base state. In such a case, it is also said that the function of increasing the number of openings of the variable prize winning device 22 is activated.

In the high base state, the probability fluctuation function for normal symbols, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 are activated, compared to the low base state in which these functions are not activated. , the period during which the second starting port 21 is open becomes longer (the opening time per unit time becomes longer), and the frequency of game balls entering the second starting port 21 increases (also referred to as a "high frequency state"). ). As a result, the frequency of execution of the first special symbol validity determination increases. As mentioned above, in a high base state, you can aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have.

Further, if the opening time is the same, the smaller the number of openings, the lower the possibility that the game ball will pass through the second starting port 21. In this embodiment, the opening mode of the second starting port 21 in the high base state is set to one opening of 6.0 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be extremely short (1 second). In addition, since the second starting port 21 is in the closed state while the normal symbols are changing, the normal symbol changing time is the time when the game ball begins to flow down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 in the closed state. The time is set to such an extent that the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 opens before the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface. When the movable member 23 becomes an open state while flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 enters the second starting port 21 which is in the open state. In addition, in order to prevent the game balls flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 from passing through the upper surface of the movable member 23, the material constituting the upper surface (game ball passage) of the movable member 23 is It is made of a material with a higher coefficient of friction than the material that makes up the ball passage (the materials are different).

Thereby, the speed of the game ball flowing down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set to be slower than the speed of the game torrent in the game ball path on the front side thereof. In addition, as a mode for reducing the flow rate, the inclination angle may be made gentler, or an inhibiting member (such as a protrusion) that reduces the flow rate may be provided. In addition, as a result, in the high base state, the game ball that has flowed down to the second starting port 21 does not enter the second starting port 21 (flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23), and can be moved to the second grand prize opening. 35 is further reduced. In other words, in the high base state, even if there is a small hit and the second big prize opening 35 is in the open state (ball entry possible state), the game ball that has flown down will enter the second starting opening 21 and enter the second It is difficult to enter the ball into the grand prize opening 35. Further, the third out port 34c can also prevent the game ball that has flown down to the second large winning port 35 from entering the second large winning port 35.

The high base state may not be one in which all of the above functions are activated. That is, due to the activation of at least one of the probability fluctuation function for normal symbols, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22, the second starting port is more open than when the function is not activated. It is sufficient that the number 21 is easily released (the frequency of ball entry is high). Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without accompanying the time saving state of the special symbol. A function that generates such a high base state is called a "high base generation function."

As mentioned above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, since the determination of the validity of the second special symbol is more advantageous for the player than the determination of the validity of the first special symbol, the player There is a possibility that the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner without being displayed in a variable manner. That is, even in the normal state (low probability low base state), there is a possibility that the player attempts to play a right-handed game. However, as mentioned above, in the normal state (low probability low base state), the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is extremely long compared to the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol. Therefore, even if the second special symbol is displayed variably in the normal state (even if the ball enters the third starting port 26), it cannot be displayed variably many times, and the game efficiency is extremely low. It has become bad. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to display the first special symbol in a variable manner in a left-handed game than to display the second special symbol in a variable manner in a right-handed game. Here, the "state where the first special symbol is not being played (non-gaming state)" means that the first special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reservations of the first special symbol is "0". ”. In addition, "a state in which the second special symbol is not being played (non-gaming state)" means that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reservations for the second special symbol is "0". It means that.

In addition, in high base states such as high-accuracy high-base states and low-accuracy high-base states, the frequency of the second starting port 21 being in the open state increases, and the first special symbol time saving function reduces the variation time of the first special symbol. The time is shortened, and the game efficiency of right-handed games is improved. In such a case, the game can proceed more advantageously by playing a right-handed game and determining the validity of the first special symbol than by playing a left-handed game. In addition, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is opened more easily than in the low base state, and it is easier for the ball to enter the second starting port 21 than to enter the first starting port 20. This is because. Therefore, while passing the game ball to the gate 28 which is a trigger for determining whether the symbol is correct or not, the player performs a right hit to cause the game ball to enter the second starting port 21.

In addition, in the high accuracy low base state, due to the second special symbol time saving function, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened, and the game efficiency in the right-handed game is improved. In such a case, the game can proceed more advantageously by playing a right-handed game and determining whether the second special symbol is correct or not, which is advantageous for the player. Furthermore, in the high-accuracy, low-base state, the frequency of balls entering the second starting port 21 is the same as in the low-accuracy, low-base state (normal state), and the frequency of balls entering the second starting port 21 is the same as in the low-accuracy, low-base state (normal state). The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is changing for a long time (compared to the low probability low base state). In addition, in the high-accuracy/low-base state, the probability variation function for normal symbols, the variation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable prize winning device 22 are not operating, so the entry to the second starting port 21 is not activated. The ball frequency is low compared to the high base state. Therefore, the prize ball based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is less likely to be obtained in a higher base state. However, instead, the second special symbol correctness judgment prevents the number of game balls from decreasing between jackpots due to small hits that occur with a high probability (small win probability: 420/630), and rather causes small hits to occur frequently. It is also possible to increase the number of balls held by (occurring multiple times).

That is, in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), by causing the ball to enter the second starting port 21 frequently by playing the right-handed game, the ball entering the second starting port 21 can be increased. The player aims to generate the next jackpot by obtaining the prize ball for the target and determining whether the first special symbol is correct or not without greatly reducing the number of balls he has. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is set to one, and even if all the game balls hit to the right enter the second starting port 21, the game ball will not be awarded. The number of balls does not increase (maintenance). In addition, in this embodiment, the setting is such that about 75 to 85% of the game balls hit to the right enter the second starting port 21, so unless the ball enters the other ball entry port, the high base If the condition continues for a long period of time, the number of balls held will decrease slightly. Further, by adjusting the game nails around the second out port 34b, it is possible to adjust the rate of game balls entering the second starting port 21.

On the other hand, in the high-accuracy, low-base state, small hits are generated at a high frequency (420/630) by the second special symbol correctness judgment based on the ball entering the third starting port 26 by the right-handed game, and the accuracy is high. The player aims to increase the number of balls held in a small winning game during a low base state, and aims to generate the next jackpot by making a second special symbol correctness judgment which is more advantageous than the first special symbol correctness judgment. In the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, in the high probability low base state, the longer the period in which the next jackpot does not occur (the longer the period in the high probability low base state continues), the more small wins are generated. There are more opportunities (to execute a small winning game), which is advantageous to the player.

[Explanation of board configuration and gaming status]
In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, in the right game area 3B (second game area), various ball entry holes are arranged from the upstream side of the game area, including a gate 28 (starting gate 29), a first big winning hole 30, and a first big winning hole 30. The second starting port 21 and the second winning port 35 are arranged in the optimal order. Furthermore, since the game ball flow path in the right game area 3B is formed as shown in FIG. , passes through the gate 28 (starting gate 29), then flows down the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning opening 30, then flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting opening 21, and then flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting opening 21, and then flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting opening 35. The liquid flows down the upper surface of the opening/closing member 37 and flows down to the outlet 34. If there is a winning opening in the open state on the way down, the ball enters the opening and is ejected from the opening to the back of the game board, and the entered game ball enters the gaming area downstream from it. The configuration is such that it will not work. Further, the remaining approximately 10% of the balls that do not flow into the gate 28 enter the second out port 34b provided on the upstream side of the gate 28, and are discharged to the outside of the gaming machine. Furthermore, by adjusting the angle of the game nails around the second out port 34b, it is possible to adjust the rate of game balls flowing into the gate 28 side.

By arranging the gate 28 at the most upstream position, it is possible to prevent the game balls from reaching the gate 28 due to the opened second starting port 21 or the like. In addition, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the occurrence of a waiting time (a state in which the normal symbols do not change) due to the normal symbol reservation becoming "0". That is, by arranging the gate 28 at the most upstream side of the right game area, almost all the game balls hit to the right can pass through the gate 28, regardless of whether or not other winning holes are opened. In addition, since the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 flows downstream in the right game area as it is, the presence of the gate 28 does not prevent the ball from entering other winning holes.

When playing a right-handed game in a high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), the game ball first passes through the gate 28, and a determination is made as to whether or not the second starting port 21 should be opened. be done. In the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time (1 second), and the probability of hitting the normal symbol is set to a high probability (239/240) that is almost a hit, so the game ball is at the gate. Immediately after passing (one second), the movable member 23 operates and the second starting port 21 becomes open. That is, when a game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol validity determination is executed and the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, before the game ball that has passed through the gate reaches the entrance of the second starting port 21, 2. The starting port 21 is in an open state. In addition, since the opening time of the second starting port 21 is set to be one time of 6.0 seconds, as long as the right-handed game continues, the second starting port 21 will be closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second. , then open once for 6.0 seconds, close during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second, then open once for 6.0 seconds, and repeat the cycle (1 second closed → 6 .0 seconds open → 1 second closed → approximately 6.0 seconds open →...).

Therefore, when playing a right-handed game in a high base state, the second starting port 21 will be in an almost open state, and most (about 70 to 80%) of the game balls flowing down the right gaming area 3B will be in the second starting port 21. He will enter the ball. Furthermore, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, a first special symbol validity determination is executed. In the first special symbol validity determination, in the high-accuracy, high-base state, the probability of a jackpot is 1/63, no small hit occurs, and the probability of a miss is 62/63.

First, if the result of the first special symbol validity determination is negative, most (approximately 70 to 80%) of the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B will be in the open state after passing through the gate 28. The ball enters the second starting port 21, and the other game balls flow downstream from the game ball path that branches before the second starting port 21, and do not flow down to the second starting port 21, but enter the third starting port 21. The ball enters the ball 26 or flows into the out port 34. As a result, the first special symbol validity determination is executed continuously (with high frequency). In addition, since one prize ball is ejected by one ball entering the second starting port 21, the speed at which the balls are reduced is reduced and the first special symbol validity judgment is executed to obtain the next jackpot. It is possible to aim. Also, when one ball enters the third starting port 26, one prize ball is ejected.

Next, if the result of the first special symbol validity determination is a jackpot, the first big prize opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21 will be opened in a manner according to the jackpot type shown in FIG. . Further, the second big prize opening 35 provided on the downstream side of the second starting opening 21 is not opened in the jackpot game. As a result, when a jackpot game starts, the game ball that flows down due to the right-handed game will not be hindered from entering the ball by other winning holes such as the second starting hole 21, and will smoothly enter the first big winning hole. Enter the pitch at 30. Here, if the second starting port 21 is placed upstream of the first big winning hole 30, the state will shift to the low base state during the jackpot game, but in this embodiment, the second starting port 21 will be activated even in the low base state. Since it is designed to be in an open state, a game ball flowing down the right game area during a jackpot game enters the second starting port 21 first, and a game ball that does not enter the second starting port 21 A situation may arise in which only the ball enters the second grand prize opening 30.

Furthermore, since the number of prize balls based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is one, the execution time of the jackpot game is unnecessarily prolonged, and there is no benefit to the player. On the contrary, there is a possibility that the game becomes redundant, does not proceed smoothly, and reduces the interest in the game. Therefore, by arranging the first jackpot opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21 as in the present embodiment, such a situation can be prevented and the jackpot game can proceed smoothly. Become. In addition, since the first jackpot 30 is not opened except during jackpot games, the first jackpot 30 may obstruct the ball from entering the second starting slot 21 when the jackpot is not playing. do not have.

Next, the high-certain low base state will be explained. The high probability low base state is a low base state, but since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short, it is advantageous for the player to proceed with the game by hitting right. When a right-handed game is played in the high-accuracy-low base state, the game ball first passes through the gate 28, and a determination (normal symbol validity determination) is performed as to whether or not the second starting port 21 is to be opened. In the low base state (high accuracy low base state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be longer (3 seconds) than in the high base state, and the probability of winning a normal symbol is also lower than in the high base state. (1/240), after the game ball passes through the gate, after a short time (3 seconds), if it hits, the movable member 23 operates and the second starting port 21 opens. state. Since the probability of winning is set to 1/240, it is almost a miss, and the possibility that the second starting port 21 will be in the open state is low. In addition, instead of this mode, the probability of winning in the normal symbol correctness determination in the low base state may be set to 0/240, and all results may be incorrect. In this way, the second starting port 21 will not be in the open state in the low base state. Similarly, the winning probability in the high base state is 239/240.

In other words, in the high-accuracy/low-base state, the probability that the second starting port 21 will be in the open state is set to be very low, so the game ball that has flown down to the entrance of the second starting port 21 will not enter the second starting port 21. There is a low possibility that the ball will enter the ball, and it is set that there is a high possibility that the ball will pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23 and reach the entrance of the second big prize opening 35. In addition, the possibility that the result of the second special symbol validity judgment will be a small hit does not change whether it is in a high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) or high accuracy low base state. do not have. That is, the small winning probability does not change regardless of the gaming state (small winning probability: 420/630). Further, the result of the first special symbol validity determination does not have a small hit, and only the result of the second special symbol validity determination has a small win.

The game ball flowing downstream of the first big prize opening 30 through the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32 branches into a passage on the third starting opening 26 side and a passage on the second starting opening 21 side by the branching part. When the game ball that has flowed into the third starting port 26 side passage enters the third starting port 26, a second special symbol validity determination is executed. In addition, in the high-accuracy/low-base state, even if the game ball passes through the gate 28, there is a low possibility that the second starting port 21 will be in the open state. All the balls do not enter the second starting port 21, but flow down to the second big winning port 35 and third out port 34c provided downstream of the second starting port 21.

In addition, if the result of the second special symbol validity judgment executed based on the ball entering the third starting port 26 is a small hit, the second big winning port 35 on the downstream side of the second starting port 21 is , it is in the open state in the opening/closing mode for small winnings shown in FIG. Specifically, an opening operation of 0.3 seconds is performed six times (closing time between opening operations is 0.1 seconds, total opening time is 1.8 seconds). Then, the game balls that have flowed into the second starting port 21 side passage pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 in the closed state, flow down to the second big winning port 35, and become open due to the small winning game. The ball enters the second grand prize opening 35, which is .

Since the prize balls based on the ball entering the second big winning hole 35 are 10 prize balls for one ball entering, the ball is allowed to enter the second big winning hole 35 during a small winning game. This makes it possible to increase the number of balls held during a high-accuracy, low-base state. In addition, the high-accuracy, low-base state continues at least until the next jackpot occurs based on the special symbol validity judgment, so the longer the high-accuracy, low-base state continues, the more the player is unable to increase the number of balls he or she owns. It becomes possible. In addition, in the high accuracy high base state, the second special symbol time shortening state and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol are set to a long time (first special symbol long time state), so the second special symbol validity judgment is The frequency of execution is higher than the frequency of execution of the first special symbol validity determination. In this embodiment, it is possible to obtain on average about 20 prize balls (2 balls entered) by the occurrence of one small winning game. By making this small winning game occur multiple times (many times) until the next jackpot occurs, it is also possible to increase the amount of game balls (for example, 200 in 10 games). Also, as a result of this, the balls acquired in the small winning game can be added to the balls acquired in the jackpot game as the total acquired balls during the "consecutive game period" in which the right-handed game is continued, making it possible to acquire a larger amount of game balls. Moreover, this makes it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, the second big prize opening 35 located downstream (the most downstream of these) of the gate 28, the first big winning opening 30 for jackpots (exclusively for jackpots), and the second starting opening 21 is for small winnings ( It is said to be a big winning opening (only for small wins). In addition, by arranging the second big prize opening 35, which is a big winning opening for small winnings, downstream of the second starting opening 21, the opening operation (opening/closing control) of the second starting opening 21 allows the second big winning opening to be opened and closed. The number (ratio) of game balls reaching the prize opening 35 can be controlled. Specifically, when a small winning game is executed, the high base state ( The probability that the game ball will enter the second grand prize opening 35 is higher in the high probability low base state than in the low probability high base state and the high probability high base state. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, by forming a flow path that does not reach the second big prize opening 35 unless the ball passes through the second starting opening 21 (without entering the ball), The effect of opening/closing control of the second starting port 21 is made more effective.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a low probability high base state where a small winning game can occur, the second starting port 21 is configured to hardly be in an open state (it may be configured not to be in an open state at all). It is difficult to adjust the rate of balls entering the second big winning hole 35 when a game occurs by adjusting the ball entering the second starting hole 21. Therefore, a third out port 34c is provided between the second starting port 21 and the second grand prize opening 35, and by making it possible to adjust the rate of balls entering the third out port 34c, the second grand prize winning hole 35 can be adjusted. The rate of ball entry into the mouth 35 can be adjusted.

Furthermore, even in the same right-handed game, by entering the game ball into the second starting port 21, the number of balls held is almost maintained (including a slight increase or decrease) (or the speed of decrease in number of balls held is suppressed) ), a state in which the game is played with the expectation that the result of the first special symbol validity judgment will be a jackpot (advantageous jackpot) (high base state), and a state in which the game ball is entered into the third starting hole 26 and played in a small state. When a hit occurs, the ball enters the second big winning hole 35 to increase the number of balls held, and the player plays the game in the hope that the result of the second special symbol correctness determination will be a jackpot (advantageous jackpot) (high accuracy, low base state), and has diversified gameplay. This also makes it possible to increase interest in the game. Incidentally, for the player, the high-probability low-base state, in which he can increase the number of balls he has, is a more advantageous gaming state than the high-base state. In addition, while continuing the right-handed game, it is possible to transition between a high base state (low-accuracy high base state or high-accuracy high base state) and a high-accuracy low base state, so this also improves the gameplay. Diversify and increase interest in gaming.

Further, the start gate 29 is provided at the most upstream position in the right gaming area 3B by serving also as the gate 28. As a result, when the jackpot standby state is reached, the game ball is allowed to pass through the start gate 29 at any timing without being obstructed from passing through the start gate 29 by the second starting port 21, etc., and the jackpot game is started. It becomes possible to do so. In addition, the starting gate 29 and the gate 28 may be provided separately, but in that case, the starting gate 29 may be located upstream or downstream of the gate 28, but the starting gate 29 may be located upstream or downstream of the gate 28. It is necessary to provide it upstream of the second starting port 21, the third starting port 26, and the second big prize winning port 35.

Furthermore, when a right-handed game is to be played, the firing direction indicator 47 is controlled to light up in a predetermined manner to notify that the firing should be performed to the right game area. Furthermore, when a left-handed game is to be played, the firing direction indicator 47 is lit (displayed) controlled in a predetermined manner to notify that the firing should be performed to the left game area. Specifically, the firing direction indicator 47 is composed of two LEDs "yz", and indicates the firing direction by lighting the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the light should be emitted to the left gaming area by displaying "y□z□" (for example, □: off, ■: on), which turns off both LEDs. can. In addition, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the light should be emitted to the right gaming area as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned on, such as "y z ■" (for example, □: off, ■: on). can.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming states when the identification information (special symbols, production symbols) is displayed in a variable manner are "low-accuracy low base state", "high-accuracy low base state", " It is possible to control the game to either "low-accuracy, high-base state" or "high-accuracy, high-base state," of which the low-accuracy, low-base state is also called the "normal gaming state," and the high-accuracy, low-base state is also called the "normal gaming state." Also referred to as a "specific gaming state."

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main control section) will be explained based on FIGS. 10 to 46. Note that the counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided in the main control board 80 reads out the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80 and executes it. . As shown in FIG. 10, in the main control main processing, initial settings are first performed (S101). Initial settings include, for example, stack settings, constant settings, interrupt time settings, CPU settings of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, and CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, and various flags, status, and counter settings. Perform a reset, etc. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Further, the initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter. In addition, in the examples and drawings, the ordinary design is referred to as "ordinary design", the special design is referred to as "special design", the first special design is referred to as "special design 1" or "first special design", and the second special design is referred to as "special design". 2" or "second special map."

Following the initial setting (S101), interrupts are prohibited (S102), and normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of the various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by adding one. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80 at a period of, for example, 4 msec. Then, after the interrupt processing (S105) ends and until the next interrupt processing (S105) starts, the updating processing of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating processing (S103) is repeated. executed. Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU while the interrupt is disabled, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, interrupt processing (S105) will be explained using FIG. 11. In the interrupt processing (S105), output processing (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), commands (control signals) etc. set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below are output to the sub control board 90, payout control board 110, etc. do. The commands and the like outputted here include information regarding the gaming state, the result of special symbol validity determination, symbols as jackpot types, fluctuation patterns, and the like. Note that the command consists of, for example, 2 bytes of information. The upper 1 byte is information regarding the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information regarding the contents of the command.

In the input process (S202) that is performed next to the output process (S201), various sensors attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (first starting port sensor 20a, second starting port sensor 21a, third starting port sensor 26a) are mainly used. , the first big winning hole sensor 30a, the second big winning hole sensor 35a, the general ball entering hole sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5)) are read and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as prize ball information. It also captures a detection signal from a lower tray full switch that detects whether the surplus ball tray 62 (also referred to as "lower tray") is full and stores it in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as lower tray full data.

Next, normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S203) is executed. The normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S203) is the same process as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the updating process of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. This is performed both during the period until the next interrupt processing (S105) is started). This gives randomness to the obtained values of various random numbers.

Following the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S203), the starting port sensor detection process (S204), the starting ball entry process (S205), the regular symbol movement process (S206), and the special pattern 1 movement process (S207), which will be described later. ), special figure 2 operation processing (S208), reserved ball number processing (S209), and power outage monitoring processing (S210) are executed. Thereafter, various other processes (S211) are executed, and the interrupt process (S105) is ended. Then, until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control section), the processes of S102 to S104 of the main control main process are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and the interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control section). Then (after about 4 msec), the interrupt processing (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the commands etc. set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) are output.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
Next, the starting port sensor detection process (S204) will be described using FIG. 12. In the starting port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether a game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), then the number of normal symbol reserved balls (the number of regular symbol reserved, specifically, the counter that counts the number of regular symbol reserved value) is 4 or more (S302). On the other hand, if it is determined in S301 that the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process advances to S305.

If it is determined in S302 that the number of normal symbols reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process advances to S305. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of normal symbols on hold is not 4 or more (NO in S302), "1" is added to the stored number of normal symbols on hold (S303), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. and proceed to S305. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value of the random number counter for normal symbol validity determination (label -TRND-H, FIG. 7(B)) stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the acquired random number value (acquisition information, normal symbol acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reserved balls in the regular symbol reservation storage section provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, that is, whether the game ball has been detected by the first starting port sensor 20a or the second starting port sensor 21a. Determine (S305). If it is determined in S305 that no game ball has entered the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (NO in S305), the process advances to S309. On the other hand, if it is determined in S305 that the game ball has entered the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (YES in S305), the number of special symbols 1 reserved balls (number of first special symbols reserved, specific In step S306, it is determined whether the value of a counter provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 for counting the number of reserved first special symbols has reached four (the upper limit number). Then, in S306, if it is determined that the number of special map 1 reserved balls has reached 4 (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309. If it is determined in S306 that the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 is less than 4 (NO in S306), 1 is added to the stored number of reserved balls for special figure 1 (S307), and a random number related to special figure 1 is obtained. Processing is performed (S308) and the process proceeds to S309.

In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the random number counter for determining the validity of special symbols (label -TRND-A) stored in the update value storage area of the RAM (not shown), the random number for determining the jackpot type Obtain the counter value (label-TRND-AS) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) (the random number value shown in FIG. 7(A)), and Figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls in the first special figure reservation storage section 85a.

In S309, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the third starting port 26, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the third starting port sensor 26a (S309). If it is determined in S309 that no game ball has entered the third starting port 26 (NO in S309), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S309 that a game ball has entered the third starting port 26 (YES in S309), then the number of special symbols 2 reserved balls (the number of second special symbols reserved, specifically the main control It is determined whether the value of a counter provided in the RAM of the unit 80 for counting the number of second special symbols pending has reached four (upper limit number) (S310). Then, in S310, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special map 2 has reached 4 (YES in S310), the process ends. If it is determined in S310 that the number of reserved balls for special map 2 is less than 4 (NO in S310), "1" is added to the stored number of reserved balls for special map 2 (S311), and the special map 2 related Random number acquisition processing is performed (S312), and the processing ends.

In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S312), similarly to the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol validity determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM (Label-TRND-A), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (Label-TRND-AS), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (Label-TRND-T1) (shown in Figure 7 (A) Random numbers), and these obtained random numbers are stored in an address space corresponding to the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls in the second special figure reservation storage section 85b.

[Processing at the time of starting ball entry]
Next, the starting ball entering process (S205) will be described using FIG. 13. The game control microcomputer 81 performs the starting ball entry process (S205) following the starting opening sensor detection process (S204). As shown in FIG. 13, in the starting ball entry process (S205), first, it is determined whether the number of special map 2 reserved balls has increased by "1" (S315). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special drawing 2 has increased by "1" (YES in S315), the process moves to S316. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in special drawing 2 in S307 in the starting port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the second starting port. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S315), the process moves to S319.

In S316, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding starting port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit is read ( S316). Next, the obtained random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, among the read random numbers, the value of the random number counter for special symbol validity determination (random number value for special symbol validity determination) is determined to be a jackpot depending on the current gaming state (low probability state or high probability state). If the result of the determination is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is further determined (preliminary judgment). This judgment (preliminary judgment) by S317 is a preliminary judgment (so-called ``holding advance reading'') that performs a validity judgment (judgment as to whether or not it is a jackpot) for the special drawing 2 hold prior to a judgment in the special drawing 2 holding judgment process that will be described later. ”).

In addition, the prior judgment of whether or not it is a jackpot is based on the jackpot judgment table (see Figure 8 (A)), that is, if it is a high probability state, it is a jackpot judgment table for a high probability state, and if it is a normal state (low probability state). For example, it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot determination value matches the jackpot determination value based on the normal state jackpot determination table. In addition, as other pre-judgment aspects, as a fluctuation pattern information determination table that can determine fluctuation pattern information, there is a fluctuation pattern information determination table for normal states (for low probability states) and a fluctuation pattern information determination table for high probability states (for high probability states). It is assumed that the variation pattern information determination table has the following. In the preliminary determination, predetermined fluctuation pattern information is selected based on the obtained random number value (the value of a random number counter for special symbol validity determination, etc.) and the fluctuation pattern information determination table according to the gaming state. It is possible to do so. From this selected variation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not there is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, whether a game performance with high jackpot reliability is executed, etc.

Next, in S318, game information (pre-determination information) related to the determination result in S317, specifically, information indicating whether or not the random number value for determining the validity of the special symbol matches the jackpot determination value (jackpot information), Information indicating the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (random value for determining the jackpot type) (jackpot type information), information indicating whether the random value for determining the validity of the special symbol matches the small hit determination value (small hit information ), command data including information indicating the value of the variable pattern random number counter (variable pattern random number value), etc. is generated as a special chart 2 starting ball entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). In addition, as the special figure 2 starting ball entry command, part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read out in S316 may be sent as is to the sub-control board, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number Instead of transmitting as is, game information (for example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern information, etc.) acquired based on the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be transmitted.

In addition, by analyzing the special chart 2 start ball entry command sent from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, it is possible to determine whether the information is related to a jackpot, what type of jackpot it is, and information related to a small hit. The sub-control unit 90 can identify whether or not there is one. In addition to this, in this embodiment, by analyzing the special pattern 2 starting ball entry command, it is possible to determine whether or not the obtained special pattern 2 acquisition random number will be a jackpot when judged in a high probability state, and whether the special pattern 2 acquisition random number will be a jackpot or not It is possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot when judged based on the probability state. As a result, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 starting ball entry command as pending (production pending information), pre-determines the production pending information at a specific timing, and when it is determined whether it is correct or not in a low probability state. It becomes possible to determine whether performance suspension information that is determined to be a jackpot is stored.

In addition, from the perspective of fraud prevention, among the acquired random values read in S316, the random value for determining the validity of the special symbol is not sent as is to the sub-control unit, but the value of the random number counter for determining the other jackpot type (Jackpot Generate command data as a special chart 2 starting ball entry command, including information indicating the random number value for type determination), the value of the variation pattern random number counter (the variation pattern random number value), and information indicating the result of preliminary determination. It is possible to set

Next, in S319, similarly to the process related to the above-mentioned special figure 2, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 has increased by "1" (S319). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 has increased by "1" (YES in S319), the process moves to S321. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls of special map 1 in S311 in the starting port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the first starting port. On the other hand, if it is determined in S319 that the number of special map 1 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S319), the process is ended as is. The processing in S321 to S323 is similar to the processing in S316 to S318 described above for the special figure 1. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the starting port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit is read out (S321), A preliminary determination is performed on the read random number value (S322). Then, command data including game information related to this preliminary determination is generated as a special chart 1 starting ball entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). Note that the preliminary determination (pending pre-reading) in S322 is performed prior to the validity determination in the special figure 1 validity determination process described later.

[General figure movement processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal figure operation process (S206) shown in FIG. 14 following the start ball entry process (S205). In the normal pattern movement process (S206), the process regarding the normal pattern display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and "normal pattern movement status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these stages. . Then, if the "common pattern movement status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal pattern standby process (S402) is performed, and if the "common pattern movement status" is "2" (S401 NO in S403, YES in S403), perform the normal symbol fluctuation process (S404), and if the "common pattern movement status" is "3" (NO in both S401 and S403, YES in S405), the normal symbol is confirmed. Processing (S406) is performed, and if the "normal figure action status" is "4" (all of S401, S403, and S405 are NO), normal electric accessory processing (S407) is performed. Note that the normal figure action status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
Next, the normal symbol standby process (S402) will be explained using FIG. 15. In the normal symbol standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (S501), and if it is determined to be "0" in S501 (YES in S501), the process finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in S501 that it is not "0" (NO in S501), a normal symbol validity determination process to be described later is performed (S502), and then a normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection process, with reference to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table shown in FIG. Select a symbol variation pattern. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a low base state (states A and C), a normal symbol fluctuation pattern in which the normal symbol fluctuation time is 3 seconds is selected. Further, following the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), the below-described normal symbol random number shift process is performed (S504), and then the normal symbol variation start process is performed (S505), and the process ends. In the normal symbol variation start process (S505), the variable display of the normal symbol is started in the normal symbol variation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". In addition, in the normal symbol variation start process, a normal symbol variation start command is set in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of variation of the normal symbols.

[Normal symbol validity determination process]
Next, the normal symbol validity determination process (S502) will be explained using FIG. In the normal symbol validity determination process (S502), first, the value (label -TRND-H) of the random number counter for normal symbol validity determination stored in the regular symbol reservation storage unit is read (S601). Next, it is determined whether the state B flag is ON, that is, whether the gaming state is a high base state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state) (S602). If it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is ON, that is, in a high base state (YES in S602), the table for state B (hit determination It is determined whether or not it is a hit based on the high probability normal pattern correctness judgment based on the value "0" to "238" (S604), and the process moves to S605. That is, it is determined whether the read value of the random number counter for normal symbol validity determination (label -TRND-H) matches any of the hit determination values.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is not ON, that is, it is a low base state (NO in S602), state A (state C) is selected in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 8(C). It is determined whether or not it is a hit based on a low probability normal pattern correctness judgment based on a table (with a winning judgment value of "0" to "119") (S603), and the process moves to S605. Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal pattern correctness determination (S603, S604) is a hit (normal pattern hit) or not (S605). A normal symbol (ordinary symbol) is determined (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit (ordinary figure hit) in S605 (YES at S605), the winning ordinary symbol (ordinary figure per symbol) to be stopped and displayed is determined (S607), and the ordinary figure hit flag is turned ON (S608). ), the process ends.

[Normal pattern random number shift processing]
Next, the normal symbol random number shift process (S504) will be explained using FIG. In the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each common symbol reservation in the common symbol reservation storage unit is shifted by one position from the current position to the side from which it is read (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest level of pending memory in the general pattern holding storage section, is made empty ("0"), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth pending general pattern is cleared to 0 (S703 ), the process ends. In this way, the reservations for common maps are cleared in the order of reservation.

[Normal symbol fluctuation processing]
Next, the normal symbol fluctuation processing (S404) will be explained using FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol fluctuation processing (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S801), and if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in S801), the process is executed. Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the period has elapsed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), the normal symbol movement status is set to "3" (S803), and then the normal symbol fluctuation display is Other processing such as stopping at the display result (hit normal symbol or missed normal symbol) according to the determination result of the random number for normal symbol validity determination is performed (S804), and the processing ends.

[Normal pattern confirmation process]
Next, the normal symbol determination process (S406) will be explained using FIG. 19. In the normal symbol confirmation process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit flag is ON (S901). If it is determined that the ordinary figure flag is not ON (NO in S901), the ordinary figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the common map hit flag is ON (YES in S901), then it is determined whether the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in a high base state (S902). If it is determined in S902 that the status B flag is ON (YES in S902), the opening pattern for status B (for high base status) is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21). (S903), move to S904. The opening pattern for state B (high base state) is an opening pattern in which opening for 1.8 seconds is repeated three times, as described above. Therefore, the second starting port opening counter that counts the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened is set to "3".

On the other hand, if it is determined that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S902), the opening pattern for the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) is for states A and C (low base state). Set the pattern (S906) and proceed to S904. The release pattern for state A and state C (low base state) is, as described above, an release pattern in which the release is performed three times for 0.9 seconds. Therefore, "3" is set in the second starting port opening counter. In S904, the normal drawing operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this process is finished.

[Normal electric accessory processing]
Next, the normal electric accessory processing (S407) will be explained using FIG. 20. In the normal electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the normal figure per end flag is ON (S1001). The common symbol winning end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second starting port 21 has ended in the auxiliary game executed as a winning result. If it is determined that the normal map hit end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is being opened (S1002). If it is determined in S1002 that the second starting port 21 is not open (NO in S1002), then it is determined whether it is time to open the second starting port 21 (S1003), and if it is determined that it is not time to open the second starting port 21. If determined (NO in S1003), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1003 that it is time to open the second starting port (YES in S1003), control is executed to open the second starting port (S1004), and the process ends. In addition, if it is determined in S1002 that the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), it is determined whether it is time to close the second starting port 21 (that is, after opening the second starting port 21, It is determined whether the predetermined opening time has elapsed (S1005), and if it is determined that it is not the time to close the second starting port (NO in S1005), the process ends. If it is determined in S1005 that it is time to close the second starting port (YES in S1005), a process is performed to close the second starting port 21 (closed) (S1006), and the value of the second starting port opening counter is is decremented by 1 (S1007), and the process moves to S1008.

In S1008, it is determined whether the value of the second starting port opening counter is "0" (S1008). If it is determined in S1008 that the value of the opening counter is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process is ended in order to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1008 that the value of the open counter is "0" (YES in S1008), a normal pattern per end process is performed to end the auxiliary game (S1009), and a normal pattern per end flag is set ( S1010), the process ends. Note that the second starting port opening counter becomes "0" when the second starting port 21 is opened (opening operation of the movable member 23) three times in state B (high base state), and in state A. Also during state C (low base state), when the second starting port 21 is opened three times, it becomes "0". On the other hand, if it is determined in S1001 that the normal pattern hit end flag is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 has been completed the number of times set in S903 or S906. , the end flag per common figure is turned OFF (S1011), the flag per common figure is turned OFF (S1012), the general figure operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) will be executed again as the normal symbol operation process (FIG. 14).

[Special figure 1 movement processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special pattern 1 movement process (S207) following the normal pattern movement process (S206). This special figure 1 operation process will be explained using FIGS. 21 to 29. In the special figure 1 operation process (S207), as shown in FIG. 21, the process regarding the special symbol display section 41 and the grand prize device (first grand prize device 31 and second grand prize device 36) is divided into five stages, "Special figure 1 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of those stages. Then, if the "Special figure 1 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), special symbol 1 standby processing (S1102) is performed, and if the "Special figure 1 operation status" is "2", (NO in S1101, YES in S1103), performs special symbol 1 fluctuation processing (S1104), and if "special symbol 1 operation status" is "3" (NO in both S1101 and S1103, YES in S1105) ), perform the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106), and if the "special symbol 1 operation status" is "4" (NO in S1101, S1103, S1105, YES in S1107), the special electric symbol as a jackpot game Accessory processing 1 (S1108) is performed, and if the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5" (all of S1101, S1103, S1105, and S1107 are NO), the processing is finished. In addition, the special figure 1 operation status is "1" in the initial setting. In addition, since a small hit is not set as a result of the first special symbol validity determination, special electric accessory processing 2 is not executed in the special figure 1 action processing, but a small hit is set as a result of the first special symbol validity determination. You may. In this case, when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5", the special electric accessory processing 2 as a small winning game is executed.

[Special symbol 1 standby process]
Next, special symbol 1 standby processing (S1102) will be explained using FIG. 22. In the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls at the first starting port 20 (namely, the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls) is "0" (S1201). If it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 is "0", that is, there is no memory of the random number counter value obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 (YES in S1201), then , it is determined whether the special figure 2 is being played (S1207). Then, in S1207, if it is determined that the special figure 2 is being played (YES in S1207), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1207 that the special map 2 is not being played (NO in S1207), the process of setting the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a standby screen is in progress (demonstration screen for waiting for customers is being executed). (S1208), and if it is determined that the screen is on standby (YES in S1208), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1208 that the standby screen is not displayed (NO in S1208), a standby screen setting process for displaying the standby screen is executed (S1209), and the process ends.

In addition, if it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 is not "0", that is, there is one or more memory of the random number counter value obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 (in S1201 NO), special figure 1 validity judgment processing (S1203), special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1205), and special figure 1 variation start processing (S1206), which will be described later, are performed in this order. Here, "Special figure 2 (second special symbol) is not being played" means that Special figure 2 is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved balls of Special figure 2 is "0". It means that. Of course, this means that the jackpot game and small win game related to special drawing 2 are not being executed.

[Special figure 1 validity judgment process]
Next, the special figure 1 validity determination process (S1203) will be explained using FIG. 23. In the special figure 1 validity judgment process (S1203), first, the judgment value is stored in the lowest area of the first special figure reservation storage section 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first piece of the first special figure reservation). The value (label -TRND-A) of the random number counter for special symbol validity determination (oldest memory) is read out (S1601). Next, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON or not, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is performing a fluctuation display related to the jackpot (S1602). In S1602, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1602), the process moves to S1607.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when one special symbol is performing a variable display related to a jackpot, in determining whether or not the other special symbol is a jackpot, it is not judged whether or not it is a jackpot, but whether it is a small hit or a jackpot. It is considered either a miss (that is, it is not judged as a jackpot). In addition, since there is no small hit as a result of the first special symbol validity determination, when the second special symbol is executing a variable display related to a jackpot, the result of the first special symbol validity determination executed during that time is: Everything will come off. If it is determined in S1602 that the special pattern 2 jackpot variation flag is not ON, that is, the second special symbol does not display a variation display related to the jackpot (NO in S1602), then whether or not the probability variation flag is ON, i.e. It is determined whether the state is a high probability state (S1603). If it is determined in S1603 that the probability change flag is not ON, that is, it is in a low probability state (NO in S1603), the jackpot determination for the normal state (for the low probability state) in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8(A)) Judgment is made based on the table (the jackpot judgment values are "3" and "397") (S1604). On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability change flag is ON (YES in S1603), a judgment is made based on the jackpot judgment table for high probability state among the jackpot judgment tables (FIG. 8(A)) (S1605). In the jackpot judgment table for high probability states, the jackpot judgment values are "3", "5", "7", "311", "313", "317", "337", "397", "449". , "503".

In S1606, it is determined whether the result of the jackpot determination (S1604, S1605) is a "jackpot" (S1606), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (YES in S1606), the value of the random number counter for jackpot type determination (label -TRND- AS), the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8(B) (S1608), the jackpot symbol is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1609), FIG. 1 The jackpot fluctuation flag is turned on (S1610) and the process ends. In addition, in the case of judgment regarding the first special symbol, the jackpot type is judged using the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol, and in the case of the judgment regarding the second special symbol, the jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table. Also, if it is determined that the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is a jackpot, one of the 15R 1st jackpot, 4R 2nd jackpot, 4R 3rd jackpot, and 4R 4th jackpot will be executed. . In addition, if it is determined that the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is a jackpot, one of the 15R 5th jackpot, 2R 6th jackpot, and 2R 7th jackpot will be executed (Fig. 8(B)). On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination (S1604, S1605) is not a "jackpot" (NO in S1606), the process moves to S1607. In S1607, a missed symbol is determined (S1607), and the process ends.

Here, in the first embodiment, the first special symbol is a first jackpot variation flag indicating that the first special symbol is executing a variation display related to a jackpot (a variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed). and a second jackpot variation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing a variation display related to a jackpot (a variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed), and the main control unit 80 The corresponding flag is set in the jackpot fluctuation flag storage means provided in the RAM. In addition, as a small hit fluctuation flag, a second small hit fluctuation flag indicating that the second special symbol is performing a fluctuation display related to a small hit (a fluctuation display in which the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed). The corresponding flag is set in the small hit fluctuation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Then, when the jackpot fluctuation flag is set for one special symbol (that is, when the fluctuation related to the jackpot is being displayed), the process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot is performed in the determination of the validity of the other special symbol. Not performed. That is, control is not performed such that both special symbols perform variable displays related to jackpots in parallel. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which too much gaming profit is given to a player in a very short period of time, and to appropriately suppress the gambling nature.

[Special figure 1 variation pattern selection process]
In the special symbol 1 standby process (FIG. 22), after the special symbol 1 validity determination process (S1203), the special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1204). As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), first, it is determined whether the gaming state is state A (whether it is a low probability low base state or not) (S1701). If it is determined in S1701 that the state is A (YES in S1701), then it is determined whether the special chart 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON or not (S1702), and if the special chart 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON. If it is determined (YES in S1702), refer to the state A jackpot table (the part of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 that corresponds to state A and jackpot) and calculate the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label -TRND-T1). A variation pattern is selected based on (S1703). Note that once the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. Further, in the first embodiment, one of the fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 having different lengths of fluctuation time is selected by the state A jackpot table.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special chart 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S1702), then it is determined whether the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) is either 1 or 2 (S1705). If it is determined in S1705 that the number of reservations is either 1 or 2 (YES in S1705), state A first reservation number out table (state A and out of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 1 and 2), and select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). In the first embodiment, variation patterns P4 to P7 are selected.

In addition, if it is determined in S1705 that the number of reservations is neither 1 nor 2, that is, the number of reservations is either 3 or 4 (NO in S1705), the state A second reservation number removal table (Fig. 9), a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label -TRND-T1). As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "3" or "4", the fluctuation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "1" or "2". There is a high possibility that a fluctuation pattern will be selected. In the first embodiment, variation patterns P8 to P11 are selected. As a result, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of balls held is activated, and the average fluctuation time is shortened.

In addition, if it is determined in S1701 that the gaming state is not state A (low probability low base state) (NO in S1701), then whether the gaming state is state B (low probability high base state, high probability high base state) or not. Determine (S1708). In S1708, if it is determined that the state is B (S1708), then it is determined whether the special pattern 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1709), and if it is determined that the special pattern 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON ( YES in S1709), refer to the state B jackpot table (part of the fluctuation pattern table shown in Figure 9 that corresponds to state B and jackpot), and change based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label -TRND-T1). Select a pattern (S1710). In the first embodiment, variation patterns P15 to P16 are selected. In S1709, if it is determined that the special chart 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1709), refer to the state B out-of-order table (the part of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 that corresponds to state B and out-of-state). Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1711). In the first embodiment, variation patterns P17 to P19 are selected.

Also, if it is determined in S1708 that the gaming state is not state B (low probability high base state, high probability high base state), that is, the gaming state is determined to be state C (high probability low base state) (NO in S1708) Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON or not (S1712), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1712), the state C jackpot table (see FIG. 9) is determined. A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label -TRND-T1) by referring to the part of the variation pattern table shown that corresponds to state C and jackpot (S1710). In the first embodiment, variation pattern P23 is selected. If it is determined in S1712 that the special drawing 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1712), refer to the table for state C failure (the part of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 that corresponds to state C and failure). Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1714). In the first embodiment, variation pattern P24 is selected.

After selecting a variation pattern as described above, other processing shown in FIG. 24 is executed (S1704), and the processing ends. In other processing (S1704), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 through output processing (S201).

[Special figure 1 random number shift processing]
Next, special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1205) will be explained using FIG. 26. In the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage section 85a is set to one level lower (for example, when the first special figure reservation storage section 85a consists of an address space corresponding to addresses "0000" to "0003") , address "0000" side) (S1802). Then, set "0" in the highest address space of the first special figure reservation storage section 85a, that is, (if the upper limit number is stored), the RAM corresponding to the fourth of the second special figure reservation. The area is cleared to 0 (S1803), and this process ends. After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) of FIG. 22 is executed. In the special figure 1 variation start process (S1206), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "2", a variation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the variation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Special symbol 1 fluctuation processing]
Next, the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) will be explained using FIG. As shown in Figure 27, in the special symbol 1 fluctuation processing (S1104), first, the fluctuation time of special symbol 1 (the fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in S1204 of Figure 22, see Figure 9) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S1901). If it is determined in S1901 that the variation time of special figure 1 has not elapsed (NO in S1901), special figure 1 variation interruption processing is performed (S1914), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1901 that the variation time of the special map 1 has passed (YES in S1901), the process moves to S1903. In S1903, a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1903), and the process moves to S1904.

Next, in S1904, it is determined whether the status B flag is ON (S1905). If it is determined in S1904 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S1904), the value of the state B counter (state B fluctuation counter) that counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during state B (high base state) is subtracted by 1 (S1905), and then it is determined whether the value of the state B counter is "0" (S1906). If it is determined in S1906 that the value of the state B counter is "0" (YES in S1906), the state B flag is turned OFF (S1907) and the process proceeds to S1908. By turning off the state B flag, the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. Specifically, if it is in the low certainty high base state, it shifts to the low certainty low base state (normal state). In addition, in the high-accuracy, high-base state, the state B counter is set to "10000", so even if the counter is subtracted every time there is a change, the value of the state B counter will not actually become "0". do not have. That is, the high probability and high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

In S1908, the special symbol 1 operation status is set to "3" (S1908), and other actions such as stopping the fluctuation display of the special symbol according to the judgment results of the special symbol correctness judgment random number and jackpot type determination random number, etc. (S1909) and ends the process.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) is performed when a jackpot game or a small hit game related to special figure 2 is executed while the special figure 1 is being displayed. This is a process in which the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol 1 is temporarily interrupted, and when the jackpot game or small win game ends, the interrupted measurement is restarted. As a result, while the jackpot game or small win game regarding one special symbol is being executed, the win/fail determination process and the variable display regarding the other special symbol are not executed.

The special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) will be explained using FIG. In the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON or not (S2901), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is not ON (NO in S2901), then the special It is determined whether the jackpot flag in FIG. 2 is ON, that is, whether or not the jackpot game related to special drawing 2 is being executed (S2902). If it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S2902), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON or not, that is, the small hit game related to special figure 2 is being executed. It is determined whether or not (S2909). In S2909, when it is determined that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON, that is, neither the jackpot game nor the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is being executed (NO in S2909), the process is ended. Then, the variable display of special figure 1 is continued. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2902), and if it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2909), the special figure 1 The interruption flag is turned ON (S2903), the measurement of the special figure 1 variation time is interrupted (S2904), and the process is finished. Thereby, the variable display of the special figure 1 can be temporarily interrupted.

In addition, if it is determined in S2901 that the special pattern 1 interruption flag is ON, that is, the fluctuating display of the first special pattern is already being interrupted (YES in S2901), whether the special pattern 2 jackpot flag is ON or not. Determine (S2905). If it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2905), it is determined that the jackpot game related to the special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S2905), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (S2906). If it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small winning flag is ON (YES in S2906), it is determined that the small winning game related to the special drawing 2 is still being executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small winning flag is not ON (NO in S2906), it is determined that the jackpot game or small winning game related to the special figure 2 has ended, and the special figure 1 interruption flag is turned OFF. (S2907), restarts the measurement of the special figure 1 variation time (S2908), and ends the process. As a result, it is possible to restart the suspended variation display (time measurement of variation time) of the first special symbol.

Here, in the present embodiment 1, as the interruption flag, there is a special figure 1 interruption flag (also referred to as "first interruption flag") indicating that the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is being interrupted, and a special symbol 1 interruption flag (also referred to as "first interruption flag") of the second special symbol. A special figure 2 interruption flag (also referred to as a "second interruption flag") indicating that the variable display is being interrupted, and a flag corresponding to the interruption flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80. is set (memorized).

[Special symbol 1 confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) will be explained using FIG. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S2001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S2001), the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the jackpot fluctuation related to the first special symbol is being displayed is turned OFF (S2002), and the first The special symbol 1 jackpot flag indicating execution of the jackpot game related to the special symbol is turned ON (S2003), and the process moves to S2004. Thereby, in the special drawing 1, it is possible to indicate that the variable display related to the jackpot is ended (the jackpot is confirmed) and the transition to the jackpot game is started.

In S2004, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 15R jackpot (S2004), and if it is determined that it is a 15R jackpot (YES in S2004), the round to be executed during the jackpot game (in the mode where one round is opened once), A round counter that counts the number of times (one round is from opening to closing of the jackpot) is set to "15" (S2005), and a jackpot opening command is set to start the jackpot game (S2006). ), sets the special figure 1 operation status to "4" (S2007), and ends the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2004 that it is not a 15R jackpot (NO in S2004), the jackpot type is a 4R jackpot, so the value of the round counter is set to "4" (S2008), and the process moves to S2006. Further, a stop command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 at the timing of stopping the special symbols that are displayed in a variable manner. By receiving this stop command, the sub-control board 90 can grasp that the variable display of the special symbols has ended. Note that this causes the player to enter a jackpot standby state. In addition, if it is determined in S2001 that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S2001), neither the jackpot game nor the small hit game will start. is set to "1" (S2009), and the process ends.

Here, in the first embodiment, as a jackpot flag, a special figure 1 jackpot flag ("first jackpot A special figure 2 jackpot flag (also called a "second jackpot flag") indicating that the result of the judgment regarding the second special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot game related to the jackpot is being executed. When a jackpot game is executed, a jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored). In addition, as a small hit flag, a special figure 2 small hit flag (also known as a "small hit flag") indicates that the result of the judgment regarding the second special symbol is a small hit and a small win game related to the small win is being executed. When a small winning game is executed, a small winning flag corresponding to the small winning flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored).

Here, the round display 45 is composed of three LEDs, a 2R lamp, a 4R lamp, and a 15R lamp, and the corresponding lamps are lit and displayed at the timing when the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, in the case of a 4R second jackpot, the display mode will be "2R△4R▲15R△" (for example, ▲: lit, △: turned off). Next, the special figure 2 movement process (S211) etc. will be explained using FIGS. 30 to 39. In the special figure 2 movement process (S211), the special figure 1 movement process (S211) shown in FIGS. Since the processing is performed in the same flow as S206), etc., a simplified explanation will be given below.

[Special figure 2 movement processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, the special figure 2 movement process (S208) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 movement process (S207) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 operation process (S208) following the special figure 1 operation process (S207). The pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment can perform variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel by these special symbol 1 operation processing and special symbol 2 operation processing. That is, the expiration of the first special symbol reservation and the expiration of the second special symbol reservation ("variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol", "first special symbol validity judgment and second special symbol") It is possible to execute the judgment of validity and “appropriate judgment” in parallel. In addition, in the first embodiment, the validity determination based on the ball entering the second starting port (the second special symbol validity determination) is better than the validity determination based on the ball entering the first starting port (the first special symbol validity determination). (Figure 8(B)).

As shown in FIG. 30, similar to the special figure 1 operation process (S207), the processing regarding the special symbol display section 41 and the grand prize device (first grand prize device 31 and second grand prize device 36) is divided into five stages. "Special figure 2 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each stage. Then, if the "Special figure 2 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1151), special symbol 2 standby processing (S1152) is performed, and if the "Special figure 2 operation status" is "2", (NO in S1151, YES in S1153), performs special symbol 2 fluctuation processing (S1154), and if "special symbol 2 operation status" is "3" (NO in S1151 and S1153, YES in S1155) ), perform the special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156), and if the "special symbol 2 operation status" is "4" (NO in S1151, S1153, S1155, YES in S1157), the special electric symbol as a jackpot game Perform accessory processing 1 (S1108), and if "special figure 2 operation status" is "5" (all of S1151, S1153, S1155, S1157 are NO), special electric accessory processing as a small winning game 2 (S1109). In addition, the special figure 2 operation status is "1" in the initial setting. Since there is a small hit in the result of the second special symbol validity determination, the special figure 2 operation process has a special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) that is not present in the special figure 1 operation process.

Here, the special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108) is a common process for the special figure 1 operation process (S206) and the special figure 2 operation process (S211), and the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109) is Only the special figure 2 movement process (S211) is processed. This is because although the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment can execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel, the jackpot game related to the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. This is because the jackpot game related to the 2 special symbols cannot be executed in parallel (only one of them can be executed). In this embodiment, the result of the first special symbol validity determination does not include a small hit, but as another aspect, the result of the first special symbol validity determination may include a small win. In this case, like the jackpot game, the small win game related to the first special symbol and the small win game related to the second special symbol cannot be executed in parallel (only one of them can be executed).

[Special symbol 2 standby processing]
The special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) shown in FIG. 31 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) shown in FIG. 22, so the explanation will be omitted.

[Special figure 2 validity judgment process]
The special figure 2 validity determination process (S1253) shown in FIG. 32 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 validity determination process (S1203) shown in FIG. However, since this process is related to the special symbol 2, in S1301, the lowest area of the second special symbol reservation storage section 85b of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first of the second special symbol reservation) is Read out the stored random number counter value (label -TRND-A) for special symbol validity determination. In addition, since the result of the second special symbol validity determination includes a small hit, if it is determined that the result of the second special symbol validity determination is not a jackpot (S1304), then in S1305, the second special symbol validity determination It is determined whether the result is a small hit (S1305). When it is determined that it is a small hit in S1305 (YES in S1305), the small winning symbol is determined (S1306), the special figure 2 small winning fluctuation flag is turned ON (S1307), and the process is finished. Other processes are the same as the special figure 1 validity determination process (S1203).

[Special figure 2 variation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254) follows the same flow as the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204) shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 (S1401 to S1420). )I do. Therefore, detailed explanation of this process will be omitted. However, since this process is related to the second special symbol, refer to the column corresponding to the second special symbol in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. to select the fluctuation pattern. Furthermore, since the result of the second special symbol validity determination includes a small win, when it is determined that the small win variation flag is ON, a variation pattern is selected from the small win table according to the game state.

Furthermore, in state C, the game is played mainly by the variable display of the second special symbol (determination of the validity of the second special symbol). Therefore, in state C, there are more types of variation patterns (variation times) of the second special symbol than variation patterns of the first special symbol, and variation patterns of various times (that can execute various game performances) are selected. It is possible. Moreover, the variation time of the first special symbol is configured to be longer than the variation time of the second special symbol, thereby reducing the variation efficiency of the first special symbol. On the other hand, in state A and state B, the game is mainly performed based on the variable display of the first special symbol (determination of validity of the first special symbol). Therefore, in state A and state B, the variation pattern of the first special symbol has more types of variation patterns (variation time) than the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol has more types of variation patterns (variation time) than the variation pattern of the second special symbol. (feasible) variation patterns can be selected. Therefore, in state A and state B, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is simple (few types). Moreover, the variation time of the second special symbol is configured to be longer than the variation time of the first special symbol, thereby reducing the variation efficiency of the second special symbol.

In addition, since states A and B are game states in which the game is mainly performed by displaying fluctuations of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function of the second special symbol is inactive, and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is It is set for a long time. Specifically, in states A and B, when the second special symbol validity determination is executed and the result of the validity determination is a jackpot, the variable display time of the second special symbol is set to 110 seconds. (P12 or P20). This is set to a shorter variation time than the longest variation time set as the variation display time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol validity determination is a jackpot in state A. Further, in state B, the variable time is set to be shorter than the longest variable time that is set as the variable display time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol validity determination is a jackpot.

In states A and B, the second special symbol validity determination is not the main determination, but if the fluctuation time is set too long, the player who made the validity determination may himself execute the jackpot game related to the jackpot. There is a possibility that you will end up playing the game. Therefore, if it is a jackpot as a result of the judgment, instead of setting an unnecessarily long variation time, the variation time (the longest one) is set for the main first special symbol. Set a shorter fluctuation time than . As a result, if the result of the second special symbol validity determination is a jackpot, a variable time is set in which the player can wait, and the player is not put at a disadvantage such as not being able to obtain the profit from the jackpot that he or she has earned. do not have. Furthermore, this type of control is used because the probability of a jackpot occurring is low and the profit obtained is large.

Further, in states A and B, if the result of the second special symbol validity determination is a small hit, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 1000 seconds (P13 or P21). This is set to a longer variation time than the longest variation time that can be set for the main first special symbol in state A. Further, the variation time is set to be longer than the longest variation time that can be set for the first special symbol that is the main character in state B. Of the variable display time of the second special symbol that is not the subject in states A and B, the case where the judgment result of the second special symbol is a small hit is set to a longer variable display time than the case where it is a jackpot or a miss. Set.

Since states A and B are mainly based on the first special symbol validity determination which does not have a small hit as a result of the validity determination, it is not desirable that small hits occur frequently due to execution of the second special symbol validity determination. In addition, if there is a situation where small hits may occur frequently, a malicious player may execute the second special symbol validity determination even though the game state is mainly based on the first special symbol validity determination. There is a risk that players may gain gaming profits due to small hits. For example, if a player plays a right-handed game in a gaming state in which a left-handed game should be played, there is a risk that the player will unfairly gain gaming profits due to an inappropriate game. In order to prevent such a situation, in states A and B, if the result of the second special symbol validity determination that is not the subject is a small hit, by setting the fluctuation time to a long time (the longest time), This prevents small hits (small winning games) from occurring frequently. Furthermore, since the gaming profit that can be obtained by one small winning game is not so large, the player who generates the small winning will not suffer much damage.

Further, in states A and B, if the result of the second special symbol validity determination is incorrect, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 600 seconds (P14 or P22). This is set to a longer variation time than the longest variation time that can be set for the main first special symbol in state A. Further, the variation time is set to be longer than the longest variation time that can be set for the first special symbol that is the main character in state B. In addition, the variable display time of the second special symbol that is not the subject in states A and B is shorter than when the judgment result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and longer than when it is a jackpot. Set to . When the result of the second special symbol validity determination is a miss, by setting the fluctuation time of the second special symbol to a long time, the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is reduced, and the game state where left-handed game should be performed is reduced. To prevent a player from playing an inappropriate game such as playing a right-handed game. In addition, as another aspect, the jackpot and the loss may be set to the same fluctuation time (for example, both may be set to 110 seconds, or both may be set to 600 seconds).

In this special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), after selecting a variation pattern, other processes (S1404) are performed and this process is finished. In other processing (S1404), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 through output processing (S201).

[Special figure 2 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage section 85b is shifted to the lower side by one (S1502). Then, set "0" in the highest address space of the second special figure reservation storage section 85b, that is, (if the upper limit number is stored), the RAM corresponding to the fourth of the second special figure reservation. The area is cleared to 0 (S1503), and this process ends. After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256) of FIG. 31 is executed. In the special figure 2 variation start process (S1256), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "2", the special figure 2 variation start command is set to the output buffer of RAM, and the variation display of the second special symbol is started. do.

[Special symbol 2 fluctuation processing]
The special symbol 2 fluctuation processing (S1154) shown in FIG. 36 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 fluctuation processing (S1104) shown in FIG. 27 (S1951 to S1959). Therefore, detailed explanation of this process will be omitted.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing]
The special figure 2 variation interruption process (S1952) shown in FIG. 37 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 variation interruption process (S1902) shown in FIG. 28 (S2951 to S2959). Therefore, detailed explanation of this process will be omitted.

[Special design 2 confirmation process]
The special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) shown in FIG. 38 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) shown in FIG. 29 (S2051 to S2067). Therefore, detailed explanation of this process will be omitted. However, since the special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) is a process related to the special symbol 2, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) is different from the jackpot type (round counter setting process) and the special symbol 2 small hit fluctuation flag. Although the processing when it is determined that it is ON is different, it is as shown in FIG. 38.

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (jackpot game)]
Next, special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108) will be explained using FIG. 39. In the special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108), first, a jackpot game start processing to be described later is executed (S2101), and the process moves to S2102. In S2102, it is determined whether the jackpot start flag is ON (S2102), and if it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON (NO in S2102), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2102 that the jackpot start flag is ON (YES in S2102), then it is determined whether the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). Here, the jackpot start flag is a flag that turns ON when the player shoots a game ball into the right gaming area 3B at an arbitrary timing and passes the game ball through the start gate 29 in the jackpot standby state. . After the special symbol is confirmed and stopped as a jackpot symbol and becomes a jackpot, a game ball is passed through a start gate to turn on a jackpot start flag and a jackpot game progresses (a round game is started). Here, if the game ball is not allowed to pass through the start gate 29 after the jackpot is achieved, the gaming machine is maintained in a jackpot standby state in which the jackpot can be executed. During this time, the player can leave his/her seat and take a break such as going to the restroom, having a drink, or making a phone call. Then, after the end of the break, the player can shoot the game ball at any timing and allow the game ball to pass through the start gate 29, thereby making it possible to proceed with the jackpot game. Further, the jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that all openings of the jackpot device (first jackpot device 31) have been completed (the jackpot game has ended) in the jackpot game.

If it is determined in S2103 that the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2103), then it is determined whether the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30) is open or not (S2104), and it is determined that it is not open. If so (NO in S2104), whether it is time to open the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30) (round start time), that is, whether it is time to pass through the start gate 29 and start the first round. Alternatively, it is determined whether the interval time between rounds has elapsed and it is time to start the next round (next opening) (S2105). If it is determined in S2105 that it is not time to start the round (NO in S2105), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2105 that it is time to start the round (YES in S2105), a round start command is set (S2106), a big prize opening opening process is performed (S2107), and the process ends. As a result, the first jackpot 30 is opened according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 6) depending on the type of jackpot.

If it is determined in S2104 that the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30) is open (YES in S2104), the number of balls entering the big winning hole in that round is the specified maximum number of balls entering (this implementation In Example 1, it is determined whether or not the number has reached 10 per round (S2111). If it is determined that the specified number of balls entered (10) has not been reached (NO in S2111), then whether or not it is time to close the grand prize opening (first grand prize opening 30), that is, whether or not the grand prize opening It is determined whether a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed since the opening of the controller (S2112). If it is determined in S2112 that the opening time of the big prize opening has not elapsed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2111 that the specified number of balls entered (10) has been reached (YES in S2111), or if it is determined that the opening time of the grand prize opening has elapsed (YES in S2112), That is, when it is determined that either of the two round end conditions is satisfied, a process is performed to close the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30) (S2113). Next, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether the value of the round counter is "0" (S2115). If it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is not "0" (NO in S2115), the process ends in order to start the next round.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is "0" (YES in S2115), a jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process to end the jackpot game (S2116), and the jackpot ending period (S2117), turns on the jackpot end flag (S2118), and ends the process. Further, if it is determined in S2105 that the jackpot end flag is ON (YES in S2103), the final round has ended, so it is then determined whether the jackpot ending period has elapsed (S2119). If it is determined in S2119 that the predetermined ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2119 that the ending period has passed (YES in S2119), the jackpot end flag is turned OFF (S2120), the game state setting process described below is performed (S2121), and the jackpot flag is turned OFF (S2122). , the jackpot start flag is turned OFF (S2123), the special figure operation status setting process 1 described later is performed (S2124), and the process is finished.

[Jackpot game start process]
Next, the jackpot game start process (S2101) will be explained using FIG. 40. In the jackpot game start process (S2101), it is first determined whether the jackpot start flag is ON or not (S2151), and it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON, that is, the jackpot is not yet passed through the start gate 29 in the jackpot waiting state. (NO in S2151), then it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag is ON (S2152), and if it is determined that the variable probability flag is ON (YES in S2152), the variable probability flag is set to OFF (S2102), and the process in S2154 is performed. Move to processing. In S2154, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S2103), and if it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in 2154), the state B flag is set OFF (S2104) and the process moves to S2156. . That is, during execution of the jackpot game, in order to control to a low probability state and a low base state, the probability change flag and the state B flag are turned OFF before starting the jackpot game (round game).

Further, if it is determined in S2152 that the probability variation flag is not ON (NO in S2152), the process proceeds to S2154 without turning the probability variation flag OFF. Further, if it is determined in S2154 that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S2154), the process proceeds to S2156 without turning the state B flag OFF. In S2156, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the starting gate (S2156), and if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the starting gate (YES in S2156), the The jackpot start flag is turned on (S2157), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2156 that the starting gate has not been passed (NO in S2156), the process ends. As a result, the gaming machine continues in the jackpot waiting state. Further, in S2151, if it is determined that the jackpot start flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot game has already started (S2151), the process ends. This allows the player to start (advance) the jackpot game at any timing.

[Game status setting process]
Next, the gaming state setting process (S2121) will be explained using FIG. 41. In the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether the jackpot game that has ended this time is related to a variable probability jackpot (S2201). In this embodiment, as described above, five types of variable probability jackpots are the 15R 1st jackpot, 4R 2nd jackpot, 4R 3rd jackpot, 15R 5th jackpot, and 4R 6th jackpot, and in S2201, these jackpot games are It is determined whether it corresponds to any one of the five types. Then, if it is determined that the game that ended this time is a probability variable jackpot (YES in S2201), the probability variation flag is turned ON (S2202), and then, if the finished jackpot game is either a 4R 3rd jackpot or a 4R 6th jackpot, Determine whether there is one (S2203).

If it is determined in S2203 that the finished jackpot game is either the 4R 3rd jackpot or the 4R 6th jackpot (YES in S2203), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204) and "10000" is set in the state B counter. Set (S2205) and end the process. As a result, a high base state is set for a maximum of 10,000 times after the end of the jackpot game, resulting in a high probability high base state. It is not possible to display the changing special symbols 10,000 times during the business hours of the game parlor in one day.Therefore, by setting the state B counter to "10,000", the next jackpot will actually occur. This means that the high base state (state B) continues until It should be noted that the control may be such that the state B is set to a number of times, such as "10000", after y, and the high base state (state) is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2203 that the finished jackpot game is neither 4R 3rd jackpot nor 4R 6th jackpot (NO in S2203), that is, the finished jackpot game is 15R 1st jackpot, 4R 2nd jackpot, Or, if it is determined that it is either the 15R fifth jackpot (NO in S2203), the process ends with the status B flag kept OFF. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game becomes a high probability low base state.

If it is determined in S2201 that the completed jackpot is not a variable probability jackpot, that is, it is a low probability jackpot (low probability jackpot, normal jackpot) (NO in S2201), the state B flag is turned ON (S2206), and the state B counter is "100" is set (S2207) and the process ends. As a result, a 100-time high base state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and a low-probability high base state is established.

It should be noted that the gaming control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80) that executes the gaming state setting process (S2121) functions as a "gaming state control means".

[Special figure operation status setting process 1]
Next, special figure operation status setting processing 1 (S2124) will be explained using FIG. 42. In special pattern operation status setting processing 1 (S2124), first, it is determined whether the special pattern 1 jackpot flag is ON or not (S3001), and the special pattern 1 jackpot flag is ON, that is, the jackpot game that occurred this time is a special pattern. 1 (YES in S3001), the special figure 1 jackpot flag is turned OFF (S3002), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3003), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the special symbol 1 standby processing will be executed again as the special symbol 1 operation processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3001 that the special pattern 1 jackpot flag is not ON, that is, the special pattern 2 jackpot flag is ON, that is, the jackpot game that occurred this time is related to special pattern 2 (NO in S3001) ), the special figure 2 jackpot flag is turned OFF (S3004), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3005), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the special symbol 2 standby processing is executed again as the special symbol 2 operation processing.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small winning game)]
Next, special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109) will be explained using FIG. 43. In the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small winning end flag is a flag indicating that all openings of the big winning device (second big winning device 36) have been completed in the small winning game. If it is determined that the small winning end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is being opened (S2302). If it is determined in S2302 that the big winning opening is not open (NO in S2302), whether or not it is time to open the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35), that is, the opening time for the small win has elapsed. It is determined whether the time has come to start the first opening operation, or whether the interval time between multiple openings has elapsed and it is time to start the next opening operation (S2303). . Regarding the small winning game, the small winning game (opening operation) starts after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the small winning symbol is fixed and stopped and displayed, regardless of whether the player passes through the start gate. In other words, the player can arbitrarily decide when to start a jackpot game based on the starting gate, but cannot arbitrarily decide when to start a small win.

If it is determined in S2303 that it is not the time to open the big prize opening (NO in S2303), the process ends as is. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2303 that it is time to open the big prize opening (YES in S2303), the second big prize opening 35 is opened according to the small winning opening pattern (see Figure 6) (S2304), and finish. If it is determined in S2302 that the big winning hole (second big winning hole 35) is being opened (YES in S2302), the number of balls entering the big winning hole during the 6 opening operations, that is, the 6th time. It is determined whether the sum of all the game balls entered in the release operation has reached the prescribed maximum number of entered balls (10 in the first embodiment) (S2306). If it is determined in S2306 that the specified number of entered balls (10 balls) has not been reached (NO in S2306), it is determined whether or not it is time to close the grand prize opening. It is determined whether the opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed (S2307). Then, in S2307, if it is determined that the opening time of the big prize opening has not elapsed (NO in S2307), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of balls entering the grand prize opening during the 6th opening operation has reached the specified number of balls entering (10) (YES in S2306), the grand prize opening (second grand prize The opening 35) is closed (S2314), and the process moves to the small hit ending process of S2311. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the big winning opening has passed (YES in S2307), the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is closed (S2308), and the value of the small winning opening counter is It is decremented by 1 (S2309), and it is determined whether the value of the small win opening counter is "0" (S2310). If it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit release counter is not "0" (NO in S2310), the process is ended as it is in order to start the next release operation.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small win opening counter is "0" (YES in S2310), the process moves to the small win ending process in S2311. In S2311, as a small winning ending process to end the small winning game, a small winning ending command is set (S2311), a small winning ending period is started (S2312), a small winning ending flag is set (S2313), Finish processing. Incidentally, the small winning opening counter becomes "0" when the big winning opening is opened six times.

Also, if it is determined in S2301 that the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), the 6 opening operations have been completed (or the specified number of game balls have entered the ball), so It is determined whether the small winning ending time has elapsed (S2315), and if it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2315), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2315 that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned OFF (S2316), the special figure operation status setting process 2 is performed (S2317), and the process ends. By generating a small winning game in a high-accuracy/low-base state, it becomes possible to aim for the next jackpot while increasing the number of balls held, thereby increasing the interest in the game. In addition, at the start of the small winning game, the probability change flag and the state B flag are not switched from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON. Further, when the small winning game ends, the game state setting process is not performed. That is, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state (probability state, base state) is not changed before and after the execution of the small winning game.

[Special figure operation status setting process 2]
Next, special figure operation status setting processing 2 (S2317) will be explained using FIG. 44. In the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON or not (S3101). If it is determined that it is related to special symbol 1 (YES in S3101), the special symbol 1 small hit flag is turned OFF (S3102), the special symbol 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3103), and the process is executed. Finish. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the special symbol 1 standby processing is executed again as the special symbol 1 operation processing. In this embodiment, since the result of the first special symbol validity determination does not include a small hit, the special symbol 1 small hit flag will not be turned ON. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special pattern 1 small hit flag is not ON, that is, the special pattern 2 small winning flag is ON, that is, the small winning game that occurred this time is related to special pattern 2 (NO in S3101). ), the special figure 2 small hit flag is turned OFF (S3104), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3105), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the special symbol 2 standby processing is executed again as the special symbol 2 operation processing.

[Held pitch count processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball number process (S209) following the special figure 2 operation process (S208). As shown in FIG. 45, in the reserved ball number processing (S209), first, the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls, the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 is read ( S2501). Next, data on the number of held balls (a held ball number command for transmitting the held ball number information to the sub-control board 90, etc.) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502), and the process ends.

[Power-off monitoring processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power-off monitoring process (S210) following the pending ball count process (S209). As shown in FIG. 46, in the power-off monitoring process (S210), first, it is determined whether a power-off signal is input (S2601), and if it is determined that there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2601 that a power-off signal has been input (YES in S2601), the current state of the gaming machine (whether or not it is variable rate, whether it is playing a winning game, how many balls are on hold, whether it is variable rate or time saving), Data regarding the number of remaining fluctuations, etc.) are stored in the RAM (S2602), a power-off flag is turned on (S2603), and thereafter loop processing (infinite loop) is performed without returning to the interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

As explained in detail above, the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment has the above-mentioned characteristic configuration, and thus has unique effects not found in conventional pachinko game machines, or has unique effects compared to conventional pachinko game machines. It has a remarkable effect. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the first special symbol (also referred to as "first information") or the second special symbol (also referred to as "second information") becomes a jackpot in the special symbol validity determination. A high-probability state occurs (a benefit is given) based on the symbol (stopping and displaying in a specific display mode), and when a predetermined condition is met, a high-probability state (a benefit) occurs. is assumed to end.

The process (gaming state setting process (S2121)) for granting this high probability state (privilege) can also be referred to as "privilege granting means". In addition, the first special symbol and the production symbol 8 are linked (synchronized), the second special symbol and the production symbol 8 are linked (synchronized), and the fluctuating display and stop display are performed to show the same validity judgment result. , "The special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol" can be replaced with "the production symbol is stopped and displayed at the winning production symbol (specific display mode)" .

[Sub control main processing]
Next, the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 (control processing by the sub-control unit 90) will be explained based on FIGS. 47 to 52. Note that the counters, flags, status, buffers, timers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (sub-control unit). When the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, the production control microcomputer 91 provided in the sub-control board 90 reads out and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 47 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main processing, first, CPU initialization processing is performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack settings, constant settings, CPU 92 settings, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, and various flags, status, and counter resets are performed.

Subsequently, in S4002, it is determined whether the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the result of this determination is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub control board 90. In other words, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized. If the power-off signal is turned ON but the contents of the RAM are maintained normally (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. When the RAM is initialized, various flags, statuses, and counter values are reset. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and are not executed thereafter. In addition, in the first embodiment, the performance control microcomputer 91 also performs the same process as the power-off monitoring process (S209) by the game-control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. When turned ON, data related to the effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. In other words, data related to performance control in the event of a power outage such as a power outage is backed up. For this reason, unless the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003) when the power is turned on after recovering from a power outage such as a power outage (returning from a power outage), the effect will be controlled by the effect control microcomputer 91. The state returns to the state before the power failure occurred.

In S4004, interrupts are prohibited. Next, random number seed update processing is executed (S4005). In the random number seed updating process (S4005), the values of various performance determining random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub control board 90. The random number for performance determination includes a random number for determining a variable performance that determines the mode of performance symbol game performance to be executed (variable performance pattern), a random number for determining a preview performance that determines a preview performance, and a random number for determining a performance symbol that determines a performance symbol. There are random numbers, etc. The random number updating method can be the same as the random number updating process performed by the main control board 80 described above. Note that when updating the random numbers, the random numbers may be added in increments of 2 instead of incrementing them in increments of 1. The random number for performance determination is acquired at a predetermined timing. This timing may be, for example, when the main control board 80 sends a control signal (starting ball command) notifying that a starting ball has arrived, or when the main control board 80 sends a control signal (starting ball entering command) notifying the start of fluctuation. This can be done when a fluctuation start command (fluctuation start command) is sent, or when a fluctuation effect pattern (to be described later) is determined. The acquired random number for effect determination is stored in a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, a command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer (also referred to as "sub output buffer") in the RAM of the sub control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, and the lamp control board 100. Among the boards 107, the command is sent to the control board to which the corresponding command is sent. Each control board (each control unit) that receives the command uses various presentation devices (image display device, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) to perform various presentations according to the received command. (Performance pattern game effects, special game effects related to winning games, etc.). The production control microcomputer 91 then permits an interrupt (S4007). After that, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control of performance symbols, etc., executed on each display screen of the image display device 7 (first image display device), second image display device 71, and third image display device 72 is performed. It is also possible to control the lighting of various lamps, control the operation of movable decorative members, and control the audio output from speakers.

[Reception interrupt processing]
Next, the reception interrupt processing (S4008) will be explained using FIG. 48. In the reception interrupt processing (S4008), first, it is determined whether the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON or not, that is, whether the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input section of the production control microcomputer 91. Determine (S4101). If it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands sent from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the process ends. . This reception interrupt process (S4008) is a process that is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009) will be explained using FIG. 49. The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process that is executed every time an interrupt pulse with a 2 msec period is input to the sub control board 90. In the 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), first, input processing is performed to create switch data (edge data and level data) based on detection signals from the production button detection switches 63c and 63d (S4201). Next, lamp data output processing (S4202) is performed to output lamp data for emitting light from lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5, and drive data for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electrical drive source) is performed. drive data output processing (S4203). Note that the lamp data and drive data are created by a 10ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later. Then, watchdog timer processing is performed to reset the watchdog timer (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10ms timer interrupt process (S4010) will be explained using FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process that is executed every time an interrupt pulse of 10 msec period is input to the sub control board 90. In the 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4010), first, received command analysis processing (S4302), which will be described later, is performed. Next, a switch state acquisition process is performed in which the switch data created in the 2ms timer interrupt process is stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 as switch data for the 10ms timer interrupt process (S4303), and the switch data stored in the switch status acquisition process is Switch processing is performed to set the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the data (S4304). Thereafter, other processes such as creating lamp data (data for controlling lighting of the board lamp 5 and frame lamp 66) and updating random numbers for effect determination are executed (S4305).

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described using FIG. 51. In the received command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not a starting ball command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and if it is determined that a starting ball entering command has not been received (NO in S4401). , the process moves to S4403, and when it is determined that the starting ball entry command has been received (YES in S4401), the production pending information storage process (S4402) is performed, and the process moves to S4403. Performance pending information storage processing (S4402) stores various information (pre-judgment results, jackpot type determination error) included in the starting ball entry command (special chart 1 starting ball command or special chart 2 starting ball command) received in S4401. (game information such as numerical values, random fluctuation pattern values, etc.) according to the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the number of special symbol pending balls at the time of sending and receiving the starting ball entry command (when generating the command) , is stored in a predetermined effect pending information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in a shift memory format. For example, if the received starting ball command is a special chart 1 starting ball command that corresponds to the number of reserved balls of special chart 1 "4", the preliminary judgment result and hit type included in the special chart 1 starting ball command This information is stored as special figure 1 performance pending information in an area corresponding to the number of reservations 4 in the special figure 1 performance pending information storage area. The performance pending information stored in this way is used to execute various performances such as a variable performance, a preview performance, and a performance mode, which will be described later. The storage contents (performance pending information) of the production pending information storage area in the sub-control board 90 are stored in the special figure pending storage section (first special figure pending storage section, second special figure pending storage section) in the above-mentioned main control board (main control section) 80. This matches the stored content (obtained information) of the reserved storage unit). From this, the performance pending information storage area of the sub-control board 90 can also be said to be an "acquired information storage means."

Next, in S4403, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403), and if it is determined that a fluctuation start command has been received (YES in S4403), a fluctuation production start process ( S4404) and moves to the process of S4405, and if it is determined that the fluctuation start command has not been received (NO in S4403), the process moves to the process of S4405 without performing the fluctuation effect start process. In S4405, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405), and if it is determined that a fluctuation stop command has been received (YES in S4405), the performance symbols are stopped and displayed and the fluctuation performance is started. Performs variable performance termination processing to be terminated (S4406). In the fluctuating performance end process (S4406), a fluctuating performance end command for stopping and displaying the performance symbol 8 and ending the fluctuating performance is set in the sub output buffer. When the set variable effect end command is sent to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 changes the effect pattern 8 that was being displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The display is stopped and the variable performance (performance symbol game performance) is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4405 that the fluctuation stop command has not been received (NO in S4405), the process proceeds to S4407 without performing the fluctuation production end process. Incidentally, the variable effects refer to various effects performed in accordance with the variable display of special symbols.

Subsequently, in S4407, it is determined whether a winning game related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4407). Here, the winning game-related commands are commands sent from the main control board 80 when executing winning games (big winning games, small winning games), and specifically, the commands are the commands that are sent from the main control board 80 when executing winning games (big winning games, small winning games). ), a round start command that is sent when a round starts, a round end command that is sent when a round ends, an ending command that is sent when a jackpot game ends, and the first big prize opening in a round game. This applies to the 1st grand prize opening ball entry command sent based on the ball entering 30, the 2nd grand prize opening ball entry command sent based on the ball entering the 2nd grand prize opening in a small winning game, etc. . In S4407, it is determined whether any of these jackpot game related commands have been received, and if not received (NO in S4407), the process moves to S4409, and if received (YES in S4407) , performs processing related to execution of performance (big hit game performance, small win game performance) according to the type of the received command (S4408).

For example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening performance command that specifies an opening performance according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer, and if the received command is a round start command, the command A round performance command that specifies a round performance according to the round specified based on the round is set in the sub output buffer, and if it is an ending command, an ending that specifies an ending performance according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command. Set the production command to the sub output buffer. In addition, if the received command is a big winning hole entry command (1st big winning hole entry command, 2nd big winning hole entry command), the big winning hole (1st big winning hole ball entry command) specified based on the command A ball entering performance command that specifies a ball entering performance according to the ball entering the opening 30 and the second big prize opening 35 is set in the sub output buffer. When the various performance commands related to the set winning games are sent to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 controls the opening performance and the round according to the progress of the winning games. Performances, ball entering performances, etc. are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Finally, the process of S4409 is performed to end this process. In S4409, as other processing, processing based on other received commands (for example, normal symbol fluctuation start command and normal symbol fluctuation stop command) other than the various commands described above is performed (S4409).

[Variable effect start processing]
Next, the variable effect start process (S4404) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be explained using FIG. 52. In the variable performance start processing (S4404), first, performance determination random number processing (S4501) is performed to obtain various performance determination random numbers such as a variable performance determination random number, a preview performance determination random number, and a performance pattern determination random number. In this embodiment, the process of S4501 is performed at the timing when the fluctuation start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is acquired from each random number. Based on this acquired value (acquired information), the mode of the performance symbol game performance (variable performance) to be executed, the mode of the preview performance (including the presence or absence of the preview performance), the performance pattern to be stopped and displayed, etc. are determined.

Next, in S4502, the received fluctuation start command is analyzed (S4502). The fluctuation start command includes a fluctuation pattern designation command (information that designates a fluctuation pattern) that designates the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The fluctuation pattern designation command includes the fluctuation pattern information (P1 to P33) shown in FIG. It includes the result, symbol information specifying the jackpot type, etc. (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are variable pattern designation commands that correspond to the first special symbol and those that correspond to the second special symbol, by analyzing the fluctuation pattern designation command, the production symbol game production to be started this time It becomes possible to determine whether the (variable display of performance symbols) is related to special figure 1 or special figure 2. Incidentally, the variable pattern information, game state information, symbol information, etc. can also be used in other processes other than the variable performance start process to be executed thereafter.

Next, in S4503, the performance control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the production mode to be executed. The mode status is any value from "1" to "5", and each value is assigned to the production mode A to E. Specifically, mode status "1" corresponds to production mode A, mode status "2" corresponds to production mode B, mode status "3" corresponds to production mode C, and mode status "4" corresponds to production mode C. The mode status "5" corresponds to the production mode D, and the mode status "5" corresponds to the production mode E. By referring to the current mode status, it is possible to specify the current production mode.

Here, the performance mode is a performance mode mainly using the image display device 7, and when the performance mode is different, part or all of the performance mode of the game performance, such as a preview performance or a reach performance, is different. . Specifically, the image displayed on the image display device 7 may vary depending on the production mode, such as the appearance of the production pattern 8 (for example, pattern design, number design, etc.) being different, or the appearing characters, items, and background images being different. considered to be different. In addition, the production symbol game production can also be executed in a manner according to the production mode, and when providing multiple game productions (notification production, reach production, etc.), different game production can be executed depending on the production mode. It can be done. In this embodiment, production modes A and B are executed when controlled to a low-accuracy low base state, production modes C and D are executed when controlled to a high-accuracy low base state, and production mode E is executed when controlled to a low-accuracy high-base state and when controlled to a high-accuracy high-base state. Therefore, when the production mode is one of A to D, the player can understand whether the current gaming state is a low-probability low-base state or a high-probability low-base state by checking the production mode. becomes possible. On the other hand, when the production mode is E, even if the player checks the production mode, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the current gaming state is a low probability high base state or a high probability high base state. be. In that sense, production mode E can be said to be a gaming state non-notification mode.

Next, in S4504, the image display device 7, the board lamp 5, the movable decoration member 14, etc. are used to create a variable effect pattern (a variable effect pattern, a effect pattern, etc.) which is mainly controlled by the sub-control unit 90. A variable performance pattern determination table (not shown) and a preview performance determination table for determining game performance (S4504) are set. Specifically, based on the mode status (current production mode) referenced in S4503 and the variation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80, a variation production pattern determination table to be used and a preview production determination table are set. . That is, it is equipped with a plurality of variable performance pattern determination tables and a plurality of advance notice performance determination tables, and from these, a predetermined variable performance pattern determination table and advance notice performance determination table are set based on the gaming state (performance mode), etc. do. For example, if the variation pattern information specified by the received variation pattern specification command is "P1 (variation pattern P1)" (see Figure 9), the variation performance pattern determination table will be used to determine when the jackpot corresponding to the current production mode A variable performance pattern determination table and a preview performance determination table are set. The variable production pattern determination table is mainly used to determine the execution mode of production symbol game production (variation mode of production symbols, etc.), and contains multiple variable production pattern determination tables ( (not shown) is stored in advance in the ROM of the sub control board 90. In S4504, the table corresponding to the mode status (current performance mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set from among these variable performance pattern determination tables.

Next, in S4505, based on the random number for determining the variable effect obtained in S4501 and the variable effect pattern determination table set in S4504, a variable effect pattern that matches the specified variable pattern is selected and set ( S4505). As the variation performance pattern, the variation mode of the performance symbol 8 (execution mode of the performance symbol game performance) mainly displayed in the performance symbol display area 7b is set. As a result, in the production symbol game production, when performing a reach production (design game production with reach effect) or when performing a character production using a specific character (character production symbol game production), the reach production or character A case where the performance is not executed (ready-to-reach non-performance symbol game performance), etc. is determined. In addition, the reach effect is, for example, a display mode of the effect pattern 8 when the result of the special symbol validity judgment indicates a jackpot, where three effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all the same (double number). In the case where a mode (jackpot mode, specific mode) is provided, two of the three production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) with the symbols (same production pattern) that constitute the jackpot mode. ), and the remaining one continues to be displayed in a variable manner (scrolling display), whether or not the remaining one production symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol (three same production symbols) that completes the jackpot mode. It refers to a performance that shows. At this time, a game performance is executed using a predetermined character as the performance symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner, and it is determined whether the performance symbols are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode, and whether the predetermined character achieves a predetermined purpose. It is also possible to show this with a performance. Such game performances (ready-to-reach performances and character performances described later) can also be referred to as story performances (specific game performances) and objective performances (specific game performances). Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's expectation of winning the jackpot and increase his/her interest in the game.

In addition, in S4505, based on the random number for effect design determination obtained in S4501 and a stop symbol determination table (not shown), the effect pattern 8 to be stopped and displayed (also referred to as "stop effect pattern") is determined and set. The performance symbol 8 that is stopped and displayed as a result of the game performance is a result of the special symbol validity judgment, and if it is a reach or miss, three performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "787" are displayed. One of the performance symbols is considered to be a different one from the other performance symbols, and when it is out of reach, at least one of the three performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, such as "635", is different from the others. It is said to be a barakeme with different production designs.

In addition, in S4506, a notice performance (notice performance pattern) to be executed in conjunction with a variable performance pattern (performance symbol game performance) is determined. In addition, the performance including the preview performance to be executed is also referred to as the performance symbol game performance. This preview performance is a performance (in advance) that indicates the possibility that the result of the current performance symbol game performance will be stopped and displayed in a jackpot manner before the performance symbol stops display (determined stop display) (during the fluctuating display of the performance symbol). This is a public announcement). In S4506, based on the random number for determining the preview performance obtained in S4501 and the preview performance determination table set in S4504, a preview performance (preview performance pattern) that matches the specified variation pattern and the determined variation performance pattern is selected. , set this (S4506).

Then, in S4507, based on the variable performance pattern and preview performance set in S4505 and S4506, a variable performance start command for starting the performance symbol game performance etc. is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 ( S4507), the variable performance start process ends. When the variable effect start command set in S4507 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 transmits the variable effect pattern specified based on the variable effect start command, that is, in S4505 Predetermined image data corresponding to the variable effect pattern set in is read out from the ROM of the image control board 100, and a variable effect etc. based on the read image data is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, a variable display (blinking display) using two LEDs on the effect display 102 is also performed.

[Summary of production symbol game production]
Next, an overview of the performance symbol game performance (variable performance) of this embodiment will be explained. As described above, when the variable performance start command for starting the performance symbol game performance etc. based on the variable performance pattern etc. set in S4505 is transmitted from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the image display device 7 The variable display of the effect pattern 8 is started on the display screen 7a. A performance symbol game performance (variable performance) is constituted as a series of performances from the start to the end (stop) of the variable display of the performance symbols 8.

In principle, the fluctuating display of the production pattern 8 is performed by vertically scrolling the pattern in the order of "1" → "2" → "3" ... → "7" → "8" → "9" (in ascending order). (vertical scrolling), and when it reaches "9", returns to "1" again and repeats vertical scrolling. The mode of variable display of the effect symbols 8 is determined by the variable effect pattern stored in the above-mentioned variable effect pattern determination table. Therefore, in addition to vertical scrolling, there are various types of variable display, such as horizontal scrolling (horizontal scrolling), and switching displays where symbols (numbers) change sequentially on the spot without scrolling. It is possible to provide the aspect as a variable effect pattern. Further, it is also possible to provide a mode in which the symbols "1" to "9" are displayed in descending order. Furthermore, it is also possible to set the manner of variable display depending on the performance mode and gaming state.

In addition, the fluctuating display of the production pattern 8 is performed according to the fluctuating time determined by the fluctuating pattern of the special symbol, and the fluctuating display is stopped as the fluctuating time elapses, but in this embodiment, the fluctuating display is stopped when the fluctuating display is stopped. It has a plurality of stopping modes (stopping patterns). Specifically, as the main stopping modes, (1) the stopping order (also referred to as "stopping order") of each of the production symbols 8L (left symbol), 8C (middle symbol), and 8R (right symbol) is "left symbol". → middle symbol → right symbol” (also referred to as “first stopping mode”); (2) stopping order of each symbol is “left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol” (“ (3) A stopping mode in which all the stop times (stop timings) of each symbol are approximately the same (also referred to as "simultaneous stopping") (also referred to as "third stopping mode"). and (4) a stopping mode (also referred to as a "fourth stopping mode") in which the left and right symbols stop at approximately the same timing and the middle symbol stops after that. These stop modes (stop patterns) are included in the execution mode of the production symbol game production, and depending on the variable production pattern selected (set) in S4505, it is determined in which stop mode the variable display will be stopped. It has become a thing. That is, in this embodiment, the selection/determination (setting) of the variable production pattern also serves as the selection/determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). However, it is also possible to separately process the selection/determination (setting) of the variable production pattern and the selection/determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). Furthermore, the stopping symbol that is first in the stopping order is also referred to as the "first stopping symbol", the stopping symbol that is second in the stopping order is also referred to as the "second stopping symbol", and the stopping symbol that is the third stopping symbol in the stopping order. This is also called the "third stop symbol" or "final stop symbol."

Among the first to fourth stopping modes, the first stopping mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol) is mainly used when the result of the second special symbol validity judgment is "small" when in production mode C (state C). This is a stop mode that can be executed when stopping the variable display when the effect pattern 8 is displayed in a variable manner based on the fact that it is a hit.

The second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) mainly occurs when (1) production mode A, B (state A), the result of the first special symbol validity judgment is "miss" or "jackpot" When the variable display of the production symbol 8 is performed based on the following, (2) when in production mode E (state B), the result of the first special symbol validity determination is “miss” or “jackpot”. When the variable display of the production pattern 8 is performed based on the variation mode with reach (also referred to as "reach variation") or the variation mode without reach (also referred to as "normal variation"), and (3) production mode C ( In state C), when the fluctuating display of the production pattern 8 is performed as a reach fluctuation or a normal fluctuation based on the result of the second special symbol validity determination being "miss" or "jackpot", the relevant fluctuation display This is a stop mode that can be executed when stopping.

The third stop mode (stopping all symbols at the same time) is mainly used in (1) production modes A and B (state A), under the situation where the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls of special symbols works (when the fluctuation starts When the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is "3" or "4"), the result of the first special symbol validity judgment is "miss", and based on this, the fluctuation display of production symbol 8 is performed in normal fluctuation. , (2) In production mode E (state B), when the variation display of production symbol 8 is performed in normal variation based on the result of the first special symbol validity determination being "miss", and (3 ) Stopping the fluctuating display when the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 8 is performed as a normal fluctuation based on the result of the second special symbol propriety determination being "miss" in production mode C (state C). This is a stop mode that can be executed when

The fourth stop mode (left and right symbols simultaneously stop → middle symbol) is mainly used when the result of the second special symbol validity judgment is "miss" or "jackpot" when in production mode C (state C). When the variable display of the production symbol 8 is performed based on the reach variation, and (2) in production mode E (state B), the result of the first special symbol validity determination is "miss" or "jackpot". This is a stop mode that can be executed when the variable display is stopped when the variable display of the production symbol 8 is performed based on the reach variation.

In this way, a plurality of stopping modes for stopping the variable display of the production symbols 8 are provided depending on the variable display mode and result (stop display mode) based on the production mode (gaming state) and the result of the special symbol propriety judgment. This makes it possible to vary the stopping manner by changing it depending on the game situation. In addition, for the player, it is possible to pay attention to the stop mode when the fluctuating display of the effect symbols 8 stops and guess the display mode (stop display mode) of the effect symbols 8 that will be displayed (derived display) thereafter. This makes it possible to infer the type of special game that can be executed, whether or not it will be executed, the possibility of such a game, etc., based on the manner in which it is stopped. Thereby, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the manner in which the variable display stops, and to arouse expectations for the subsequent special game.

In addition to the above-mentioned first to fourth stopping modes, for example, there is a stopping mode in which the stopping order of the three symbols constituting the production pattern 8 is "right symbol → left symbol → middle symbol" (fifth stopping mode). ), a stopping mode in which the left and middle symbols stop at approximately the same time and the right symbol stops after that (sixth stopping mode), etc. It is possible to provide various stopping modes. The conditions under which the embodiment is executed are not limited to the present embodiment, and can be determined in various ways.

In addition, in this embodiment, the symbols "1" to "9" constituting the production design 8 are colored so that they can be classified by color, and the type of symbol (design type) is determined by the color. This symbol type corresponds to the game state (production mode). Specifically, in state A (production mode A, B), among the odd numbered symbols, "7" is a red symbol (hereinafter also referred to as "red symbol"), and the other odd numbered symbols are "1" and "3". , "5", and "9" are green symbols (hereinafter referred to as "green symbols"), and the even number symbols "2", "4", "6", and "8" are blue symbols (hereinafter referred to as "blue symbols"). (also called "design"). On the other hand, in states B and C (production modes C, D, and E), among the odd symbols, "3", "5", and "7" are red symbols, and the other odd symbols are "1" and "9". is a green pattern, and the even numbers ``2'', ``4'', ``6'', and ``8'' are blue patterns.

Note that the correspondence between the designs and colors shown in this example is just an example, and other correspondences may be adopted, and the types of colors are not limited to those in this example, and other colors may be used. It is possible to use Further, in this embodiment, the symbol type (red symbol, green symbol, blue symbol) is determined by color, but it is also possible to determine the symbol type by factors other than color. For example, the type of character when a character is attached to the production design, or the type of character when the production design has a production design that represents a number (number design), and the number design when it has a performance design that represents a predetermined character (text design). The symbol type may be determined by the character design, or furthermore, the symbol type may be determined simply by the odd numbered symbols and even numbered symbols.

Due to the symbol combination (stop display mode) of the production symbols 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) that is displayed (derived display) when the variable display of the production symbol 8 is performed and the variable display is stopped according to the above-mentioned stop mode, The result of the fluctuation display is notified. In this example, the basic symbol combination (stop display mode) is a "perfectly rose" (such as "124") in which the three production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all different symbols (numbers), and the production symbol 8L (left symbol) and production symbol 8R (right symbol) are the same symbol (number), and the remaining production symbol 8C (middle symbol) is a different symbol (number) from the others (“343” etc.) ) is a losing mode (non-specific mode) that does not trigger the execution of a winning game. On the other hand, a "Zero" (such as "777") in which the three production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all the same is used as a jackpot mode (specific mode) that triggers the execution of a jackpot game of 4R or more (see Figure 6). There is.

On the premise of such a basic symbol combination, in this embodiment, among the winning combinations, the "reach winning combination" is also used as a 2R jackpot mode, which is the trigger for executing the 2R jackpot game (see Figure 6). . This is because in 2R jackpot games, the number of prize balls that the player can acquire (number of prize balls acquired) is smaller than in 4R or higher jackpot games (4R jackpot games, 15R jackpot games), and in state C (high It is a special game that triggers the setting of state B (high base state), in which it is difficult to obtain prize balls (increase in balls held) in a small winning game compared to the low probability base state), that is, it is a special game for the player. This is due to the fact that it is a special game with a relatively low advantage (profit amount). In addition, among the winning combinations, the "perfect winning combination" is also used as a small winning mode that triggers the execution of a small winning game (second special symbol) in state B (high base state). This is because, as mentioned above, in state B, the second starting port 21 is open for most of the period, so the small winning large winning port (second This is because it becomes difficult to enter the big winning hole 35), and the possibility of getting a profit from a small hit is extremely low (close to zero) (substantially equivalent to a miss). Furthermore, among the winning combinations, a "specific winning combination" which will be described later is made into a small winning mode that becomes an opportunity to execute a small winning game (small winning of the second special symbol) in state C (high accuracy low base state). Here, the small winning mode (specific winnings) is also referred to as the "first display mode", the jackpot mode (double winning) is also referred to as the "second display mode", and the losing mode (complete winnings, reach winnings) is also referred to as the "second display mode". Of the orders (Orders), the Reach-Barase order is also referred to as the "third display mode", and of the out-of-order modes (Complete Barase orders, Reach Barase orders), the complete Barase order is also referred to as the "fourth display mode".

In addition, since state A (low accuracy low base state) is a game state in which left-handed games are basically played, the first special symbol validity determination (first special symbol determination based on the ball entering the first starting hole 20) This is because it is rare for the second special symbol validity judgment (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) to be performed during the fluctuating display of the first special symbol. If the second special symbol validity judgment is made under such circumstances, the corresponding effect pattern 8 will not be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect display 102 will display the variation. Only display (and stop display) is performed. Similarly, state B (high base state) is a game state in which right-handed games are basically played, and the first special symbol validity judgment (first special This kind of situation If the second special symbol validity judgment is made below, the corresponding effect pattern 8 will not be displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect display device 102 will display the variable display ( and stop display).

Similarly, state C (high accuracy, low base state) is a gaming state in which right-handed games are basically played, so the second special symbol validity judgment (mainly based on the ball entering the third starting port 26) Since it is rare that the first special symbol validity judgment (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is performed during the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, If the first special symbol validity determination is made under such circumstances, the corresponding effect pattern 8 will not be displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, but will be displayed on the effect display 102. Only fluctuation display (and stop display) is performed.

However, if a special symbol validity determination is made that is contrary to the current gaming state (left-handed game, right-handed game) and a "jackpot" determination result is obtained (for example, if the first special symbol validity determination is made in state C) (in the event that a jackpot is achieved), one or more display devices of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display an effect indicating the occurrence of the jackpot. conduct. As a result, while the performance display (fluctuating performance) of the performance symbol 8 corresponding to the current gaming state (fluctuating display of the main special symbol) is mainly performed on the display screen 7a, it is displayed in parallel with the fluctuating display of the main special symbol. It becomes possible to notify the player that the result of the variable display of the special symbols shown is a jackpot. In addition, by suggesting the occurrence of such a jackpot, it is possible to avoid a situation where the player stops playing without noticing the occurrence of a jackpot and misses an opportunity to earn profits.

[Other aspects]
Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, when the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is set to the high probability high base state, the high probability high base state is designed to continue until the next jackpot occurs. In addition to or in addition to such a jackpot type, if the gaming state after a jackpot game is set to a high probability high base state, a predetermined number of times in the high probability high base state If the jackpot does not occur until the variable display of the special symbol (50 or 100) ends, a jackpot type may be provided in which the gaming state changes to a high probability low base state. By providing such a jackpot type, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game becomes a high base state, and when the variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times in the high base state, depending on the jackpot type, the following The gaming state of the game has a case where it shifts to a low probability low base state, a case where it continues a high probability high base state, and a case where it shifts to a high probability low base state.

As a result, it is possible to diversify the change mode (transition mode) of the gaming state, improve the gameplay, and increase the interest in the game. In addition, by executing a common game performance in the high base state from the end of the jackpot game until the predetermined number of variable displays of special symbols is executed, the predetermined number of variable displays of special symbols can be performed. After this is executed, it may be difficult for the player to recognize which gaming state the game will transition to. This increases the player's interest in playing the game in a high base state and heightens the expectation of an advantageous state. Also, as a result, even if the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is not a high-probability low-base state but a high-base state, it will change to a high-probability low-base state after a predetermined number of fluctuations. It becomes possible to play the game with anticipation. This also makes it possible to maintain interest in the game for a long period of time.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the first special symbol display device (the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b) and the second special symbol display device (c1 and c2 of the fluctuation state display device 49) ) are all displayed and controlled by the main control unit. Instead of this mode, the display of the first special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 41a, second special symbol display device 41b) is controlled by the main control unit, and the display of the second special symbol display device (variable symbol display device 41b) is controlled by the main control unit. c1 and c2) of the status display 49 may be display-controlled by another control unit such as a sub-control unit. Thereby, even if a problem occurs in the display control of one control section, if the display control of the other control section is appropriate, it is possible to notify correct game information. Further, the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display are both provided in the same display section (main display 40). As a result, the first special symbol display controlled by the main control section and the second special symbol display controlled by the sub-control section are provided nearby, and the consistency of the display contents of both can be confirmed, and the display control It becomes possible to easily check whether there are any defects.

Similarly, in the first embodiment, both the first normal symbol display device (normal symbol display device 42) and the second normal symbol display device (c3 of the fluctuation state display device 49) are display-controlled by the main control unit. It was decided that Instead of this mode, the display of the first normal symbol display (normal symbol display 42) is controlled by the main control unit, and the second normal symbol display (c3 of the fluctuation state display 49) is controlled by the sub-controller. The display may be controlled by another control unit such as a control unit. This produces the same effect as the special symbol display device described above.

In addition to the second special symbol display and the second ordinary symbol display, a second first special symbol reservation display, a second second special symbol reservation display, and a second ordinary symbol (not shown) are also provided. A hold indicator may also be provided. At this time, the main control is performed on the first special figure holding display (first special figure holding display 43a, second special figure holding display 43b) and second general figure holding display (general figure holding display 42). The second special figure holding display (first special figure holding display, second special figure holding display) and second general figure holding display are controlled by another control unit such as the sub control unit. It may be controlled by. In addition, these are the first special figure holding display (first special figure holding display 43a, second special figure holding display 43b), first general figure holding display (general figure holding display 42), It is possible to provide two special figure holding displays (a second first special figure holding display, a second second special figure holding display) and a second general figure holding display on the same main display 40. can. As a result, it is possible to improve the visibility of both, easily check the consistency of display contents, and easily check whether there are any defects in display control.

In addition, the first special symbol display device (the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b), the first normal symbol display device (the normal symbol display device 42), the first special symbol pending display device (first special symbol holding display 43a, second special symbol holding display 43b), first general drawing holding display (normal drawing holding display 42), second special symbol display (fluctuation state indicator 49) c1 and c2), the second normal symbol display (c3 of the fluctuation state display 49), the second special symbol reservation display (the second first special symbol reservation display, the second second special symbol A hold display) and a second general hold display may all be provided on the same main display 40. This improves the visibility of these display units and makes it possible to easily check whether there are any defects in the display control by the main control unit and the display control by the sub-control. Further, the main display 40 can be provided outside (outside) the gaming area 3. Further, it can be provided on the game board 2 outside (outside) the game area 3.

In addition, if there is a power outage (power outage process) for some reason during a game or while the gaming machine is in operation (while the power is on), when power is supplied again, the main control unit will display the first special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a and second special symbol display 41b), first ordinary symbol display (normal symbol display 42), first special symbol pending display (first special symbol display 41b) The figure pending display 43a, the second special figure pending display 43b), and the first regular figure pending display (general figure pending display 42) execute display (display control) first (resume and return). , a second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the fluctuating state display 49), a second normal symbol display (c3 of the fluctuating state display 49), and a second special symbol whose display is controlled by the sub-control unit. The hold display (second first special figure hold display, second second special figure hold display), second general figure hold display later executes display (display control) (resume, return) .

However, the second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the fluctuating state display 49), the second normal symbol display (c3 of the fluctuating state display 49), and the second special symbol display controlled by the sub-control unit The figure holding display (the second first special figure holding display, the second second special figure holding display) and the second regular figure holding display are image display devices whose display is also controlled by the sub-control unit. (The first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and/or the third image display device 72) executes (resumes, returns) the display (display control) first. This is a simple display control in which the main display turns on/off/blinks a single LED, while the image display device (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, or/and This is because the three-image display device 72) is composed of a liquid crystal display section and has more complicated display control than the main display.

As a result, even if the display section shows special symbol validity judgment results and fluctuation states that are controlled by the same sub-control section, the first sub-display section can quickly return to display after the power is turned on again (after the power is restored). and a second sub-display section that returns to displaying the display after a delay. Then, it becomes possible to execute optimal game control depending on each role. The first sub-display section includes a second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the fluctuation state display 49) and a second normal symbol display (fluctuation state display 49) whose display is controlled by the sub-control section. c3), the second special figure holding display (second first special figure holding display, second second special figure holding display), and second general figure holding display correspond to the simple With display control, it is possible to easily understand the fluctuating state, etc., and it is also possible to quickly recover after the power is turned on again. Further, the second sub-display section corresponds to an image display device (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, or/and third image display device 72) whose display is also controlled by the sub-control section. However, with complex display control, it is possible to display various game information and game performances (reach performance, preview performance, story performance, etc.), and to improve interest through a variety of game performances.

In still another aspect, if the power is cut off (power cutoff processing) for some reason during a game or while the gaming machine is in operation (while the power is on), when power is supplied again, the sub-control unit The display is controlled by the second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the fluctuation state display 49), the second normal symbol display (c3 of the fluctuation state display 49), and the second special symbol pending display (c3 of the fluctuation state display 49). (1st special figure holding display of 2, 2nd special figure holding display of 2nd), 2nd general figure holding display executes display (display control) first (resume, return), and the main control unit The display is controlled by the first special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a and second special symbol display 41b), first normal symbol display (normal symbol display 42), and first special symbol. The holding display (first special drawing holding display 43a, second special drawing holding display 43b) and the first general drawing holding display (normal drawing holding display 42) execute (resuming) display (display control) later. , return), and the image display device (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, or/and third image display device 72) whose display is controlled by the sub-control unit further displays (display control ) may be executed (resume, return).

Next, Example 2 of the present invention will be described. Embodiment 2 shows an embodiment of the effects that can be executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment described above and the structure related to the control of the effects. In the following, the characteristic configuration of the second embodiment will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the configuration common to the first embodiment will be omitted. Further, in the following description, symbols, step numbers, etc. that are different from those in Example 1 will be used for configurations that are different from those in Example 1, and the same symbols, step numbers, etc. as in Example 1 will be used for common configurations.

The various effects described in the second embodiment include the control processing (received command analysis process (S4302), variable effect) performed by the sub-control unit 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control), as explained in the first embodiment. This is realized by the start process (S4404), winning game effect process (S4408), etc.). Therefore, the sub-control unit 90 (performance control microcomputer 91) is also referred to as "performance execution means" or "performance control means." In addition, in this embodiment 2, the high base state (low probability high base state and high probability high base state, ie, state B) of the above-mentioned embodiment 1 is also referred to as the "first gaming state", and the low probability The high base state (state B) is also referred to as "low probability and first gaming state", and the high probability high base state (state B) is also referred to as "high probability and first gaming state", and high probability low base The state (state C) is also referred to as the "second gaming state" or the "frequent small winning state." The same applies to Example 3 and Example 4, which will be described later.

[RTC function]
As shown in FIG. 53, a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") 92 is mounted on a sub-control board 90 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment. Note that the block diagram of the sub-control board 90 shown in FIG. 53 replaces the sub-control board 90 of the first embodiment shown in FIG.

The RTC 92 corresponds to a timekeeping means that can measure the current date and time (date and time). When the pachinko game machine 1 is supplied with power from a predetermined island power supply device (not shown), this RTC 92 operates with the power, and when power is not supplied from the island power supply device, the power supply board 109 The device operates using power (backup power supply) supplied from a backup power supply circuit (not shown) included in the device. Therefore, the RTC 92 can measure and output the current date and time even when the power to the pachinko game machine 1 is not turned on (when the power supply is stopped). Furthermore, even if the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are erased (so-called RAM clear), the RTC 92 is able to measure and output the current date and time without being affected by this. Note that a backup power supply circuit for the RTC 92 may be provided on the sub-control board 90. As the backup power supply circuit, for example, a circuit including a capacitor or a built-in battery (such as a button battery) can be employed.

The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 executes the special effect-related process (S4301) in the 10ms timer interrupt process (S4010), as shown in FIG. The 10ms timer interrupt process (S4010) of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 54 replaces the 10ms timer interrupt process (S4010) of the first embodiment shown in FIG. In the second embodiment, the special effect related processing (S4301) enables execution of a special effect based on the time measurement result (RTC function) by the RTC 92. The special performance related processing (S4301) will be explained below.

[Special performance related processing]
As shown in FIG. 58, in the special performance related processing (S4301), first, it is determined whether the special performance execution flag is OFF (S5001). The special performance execution flag is a flag that indicates whether or not a special performance is being executed. In other words, it is a flag that indicates whether or not the special performance period is in progress. When the special performance is not being performed (not during the special performance period), the special performance execution flag is set to OFF, and when the special performance is being performed (when the special performance period is not in progress), the special performance execution flag is set to OFF. is turned ON. This special performance execution flag is turned ON by the process of S5003 described below when the special performance starts, and is turned OFF when the execution time (performance time) of the special performance has elapsed and the special performance (special performance period) ends. Ru.

If it is determined in S5001 that the special effect execution flag is not OFF (ON) (NO in S5001), the process ends without performing the processes from S5002 onwards. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special performance execution flag is OFF (YES in S5001), it is determined whether the current time measured by the RTC 92 is the start time of the special performance (S5002). In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a special effect based on the time measurement result by the RTC 92 described above. In other words, the special performance is executed based on the time measurement result by the RTC 92, regardless of the result of the judgment of the validity of the special symbol (special symbol variation pattern), and the time measured by the RTC 92 is the preset time. (predetermined time). In S5002, it is determined whether or not the current time is the time (start time) at which the special performance is to be started, with reference to the timekeeping status of the RTC 92.

Here, in this embodiment, the predetermined time (start time) that is the execution condition (start condition) of the special effect is set every hour from 10:00:00 to 22:00:00. ing. Therefore, the special performance is performed every hour (periodically) starting at 10:00:00 every day. This kind of special performance that is periodically executed is also called an "RTC performance."

If it is determined in S5002 that the current time is the start time of the special performance (YES in S5002), the special performance execution flag is turned on (S5003), and a special performance start command is issued to specify the start (execution) of the special performance. is set in the sub output buffer (S5004). When this special effect start command is sent to the image control board 100 by the above-mentioned command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 transmits image data corresponding to the special effect pattern specified based on the special effect start command. The image data is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and a special effect or the like based on the read image data is executed on the display screen of the image display device. Furthermore, the performance control microcomputer 91 executes output control of sound effects (performance sounds) and lighting control of various lamps in accordance with the image display (display performance) related to the special performance. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5002 that the current time is not the start time of the special effect (NO in S5002), the process ends without performing the processes from S5003 onwards.

In this embodiment, the special performance is set to be executed (started) every hour, but the interval (period) at which the special performance is executed can be arbitrarily set (selected) by the game hall. You can do it like this. For example, a setting switch (not shown) is provided on the sub-control board 90, and by operating the switch, the execution interval (period) is set to a predetermined time (for example, one of "1 hour", "2 hours", and "3 hours"). It can be configured to be settable (period setting means). As a result, when multiple pachinko gaming machines 1 are installed in a gaming hall, it is possible for the gaming hall to arbitrarily set an environment in which special effects are executed on the multiple pachinko gaming machines 1 at the same time. becomes. Incidentally, such a cycle setting can be performed not only by operating a switch on the sub-control board 90 but also by operating an effect button provided on the front frame 51. In this case, a period setting screen that can be started by a person other than the player, such as a clerk or manager of the game hall, is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 by performing a predetermined input operation. A configuration can be adopted in which the cycle can be set by operating the effect button according to the screen. It is desirable that the player cannot set the execution cycle of such special effects. This is to prevent the execution interval of the special performance from being changed without permission.

[Special performance (RTC performance)]
Next, the special performance (RTC performance) that can be executed by the above-mentioned special performance related process (S4301) will be explained. The special effect (RTC effect) of this embodiment mainly consists of a second image display device 71 and a third image display device 72 (also referred to as "sub liquid crystal") provided on both the left and right sides of the front frame 51, and the game area. It is executed using a first image display device 7 (also referred to as a "main liquid crystal") provided approximately in the center of the screen 3 and a speaker 67, and displays the main actors corresponding to the main production parts and the main actors. It is composed of a preliminary performance that is performed prior to the event.

The ROM (image ROM) of the image control board 100 stores image data corresponding to the main character appearance (also referred to as "star character image data") and image data corresponding to the preceding performance (also referred to as "preceding performance image data"). has been done. Further, the ROM of the sub-control board 90 stores sound data corresponding to the main character appearance (also referred to as "main character appearance sound data") and sound data corresponding to the preceding performance (also referred to as "preceding performance sound data"). There is. When the execution conditions for the special performance are established based on the timing results by the RTC 92, those data are read out, and the performance images related to the preceding performance and starring appearance are displayed on the image display device, and the performance images related to the preceding performance and starring appearance are displayed on the image display device. A sound effect (performance sound) related to is output from the speaker. As a result, a special performance is executed.

In addition, either or both of the leading performance image data and the preceding performance image data is also referred to as "special performance image data", and either or both of the leading performance sound data and the preceding performance sound data is referred to as "special performance". Also called "acoustic data". In addition, a production image corresponding to a leading role is also referred to as a "leading performance image," and an image corresponding to a preceding performance is also referred to as a "preceding performance image," and either or both of the leading performance image and the preceding performance image. This is also referred to as a "special effect image." Furthermore, the sound effects corresponding to the main character's appearance are also referred to as "starring sound effects," and the sound effects corresponding to the preceding production are also referred to as "preceding production sounds." Both are also referred to as ``special performance sounds.''

Here, the special production is created based on content that is appropriate for the model equipped with the RTC function, and is suitable for being periodically executed regardless of the result of the special symbol validity determination. . Examples of the subject matter (content) of the special performance include manga, anime, movies, dramas, musicians, and the like. In this embodiment, a plurality of special performances (special performance patterns) are provided, and each time a predetermined time is clocked by the RTC 92 (every hour in this example), the plurality of special performances (special performance patterns) are They are executed one by one in order. Specifically, in this embodiment, there are 20 types of special performance patterns 1 to 20, each of which has a different content of starring characters. For example, if this pachinko game machine 1 is a model based on a predetermined drama series, and the special performance is based on the theme, the main character of the special performance (special performance 1) based on special performance pattern 1 is the first The contents of the production are determined such that the main character of the special production (special production 2) based on the special production pattern 2 appears in the second episode.

On the other hand, the contents of the preceding performances constituting the special performances are common to special performance patterns 1 to 20 (special performances 1 to 20). The advance effect of this embodiment is a countdown effect that displays a countdown of the remaining period until the main character's appearance begins. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(a), a number image 200 (countdown image) consisting of a one-digit number representing the remaining time (seconds) until the start of the main character's appearance is displayed on the display screen of the first symbol display device 7. A preliminary performance (countdown performance) is executed by displaying the number approximately in the center of 7a and counting down the number one by one. In this embodiment, a countdown effect (preliminary effect) is executed from about 5 seconds before the start of the main character's appearance, and the numbers in the number image 200 are displayed counting down one by one starting from "5". Then, when the number indicated by the number image 200 reaches "0" (zero), the countdown effect ends, and following this, the main character's appearance begins (see FIG. 56(b)).

For example, when starring in a special production for a model based on a drama series as mentioned above, the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) serving as a sub-LCD displays the number of episodes such as "Episode X". An image (starring image) indicating the number of episodes (number of episodes) is displayed, and an image (starring image) indicating the title corresponding to the number of episodes is displayed on the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a), which also serves as a sub-liquid crystal. The first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) serving as the main liquid crystal displays a drama video (starring image) corresponding to the story (synopsis) corresponding to the number of episodes (title). (See Figure 56(b)). Further, while the main character is appearing, background music (BGM) such as the theme song or insert song of the drama is output from the speaker 67.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the time measured by the RTC 92 reaches a predetermined time and a special effect is executed, first, a countdown effect is executed on the main liquid crystal display screen 7a (see FIG. 56(a)). ).Following the end of the countdown performance, the main character appearance is executed on the left and right sub-LCD display screens 71a, 72a and the main LCD display screen 7a (see FIG. 56(b)). Note that the countdown effect, which is executed as a preliminary effect and indicates the remaining period until the main character's appearance starts, does not have to be based on the number image 200 as in this embodiment. It may be based on a timer image in which the number of seconds is displayed down to 1/100 seconds and displayed as a countdown. In addition to the countdown performance, advance performances include, for example, a performance that shows the lead time by counting up numbers or time (count-up performance), or introduces the contents of the lead performance that will start from now on. The mode may be any type as long as it can make the player aware that the main character is about to appear.

In this embodiment, special effects (special effects 1 to 20) based on the special effect patterns 1 to 20 as described above are executed every hour (predetermined period) in order from the smallest pattern number. That is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is operated for the first time after being installed in a game hall (power is turned on) and the first execution condition (time condition) is met, special performance 1 is executed, and thereafter, special performance 2, Special effects are executed in the order of 3. When special performance 20 is executed, the program returns to special performance 1, and thereafter, special performances 1 to 20 are executed in a loop. The performance time (execution time) of the special performance is determined according to the special performance pattern, and in this embodiment, the performance time for one performance is about 5 to 6 minutes. Therefore, a special performance execution period (also referred to as a "special performance period") of approximately 5 to 6 minutes occurs every hour (predetermined period). This makes it possible to attract the interest of players in the gaming hall and players playing the gaming machine 1.

In addition, in the normal production state where no special production is being performed, that is, outside the execution period of the special production (also referred to as the "normal production period"), information regarding the special production (starring appearance) to be performed in the next cycle is not available. It is displayed on the display screen 72a of the right sub-liquid crystal (not shown). In this case, the display screen 72a of the right sub-liquid crystal functions as an information display section that displays information regarding the next special performance (starring appearance). In this embodiment, the information regarding the special performance (starring appearance) is the remaining time until the time measured by the RTC 92 reaches the next start time, that is, the remaining time until the next special performance is executed (started). The time and details of the next special production (starring) are displayed. The remaining time can be displayed as a timer that counts down the time, for example, in the display format of "○ hours, ○○ minutes, ○○ seconds" (where ○ is any value from "0" to "9"). Further, the content of the next special production (starring) can be the number and title of the next special production (starring), such as "Episode ○: □□□□".

In this embodiment, the information regarding the next special performance (in this example, the remaining time and the contents of the lead role) is a countdown performance that is executed when the next time measured by the RTC 92 reaches a predetermined time (start time). will be displayed until the end. At this time, the countdown of the number image 200 displayed in the countdown effect ("5" → "4" → "3" → "2" → "1" → "0") and the display screen 72a of the right sub-LCD are displayed. The display is controlled so that the countdown of the remaining time ("0 hours 00 minutes 05 seconds" to "0 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds") is performed in agreement. This makes it possible to link the countdown effect (countdown display of number image 200) executed on the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a) with the countdown display of the remaining time displayed on the right sub-liquid crystal (display screen 72a). , it becomes possible to start a special performance (starring appearance) without giving the player a sense of discomfort due to a shift (inconsistency) in the countdown display (remaining time).

As mentioned above, the execution interval (period) of the special performance can be arbitrarily set (selected) to any one (predetermined time) of "1 hour," "2 hours," or "3 hours" at the game hall side. In this case, the special performance (RTC performance) will be executed (started) according to the set execution interval (cycle). Also, a special performance period will occur according to the set execution interval (cycle). Furthermore, information (remaining time, etc.) regarding the special performance (starring appearance) to be performed in the next cycle is displayed according to the set execution interval (cycle).

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control microcomputer 91 subsides information regarding the execution status of the special performance, such as the latest special performance executed based on the time measurement result by the RTC 92 and the content (type) of the next special performance. The information is stored in the RAM of the control board 90, and the information is to be backed up (backup data) when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. Therefore, for example, if you turn off the power to the pachinko machine 1 at the end of a day's business with special effects 1 to 10 running, you can turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 (start operation) on the next business day. When the first execution condition (time condition) is satisfied, the special performance 11 is executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to maintain the execution order of the special effects, and it becomes possible to avoid the inconvenience that the execution order is thrown out of order due to the game machines (installed stands) installed in the game hall.

Furthermore, the special performance does not have to consist of the preceding performance and the lead role, and may consist of only the lead role, for example. In addition, the structure of the special performance is optional, such as providing multiple pre-production performances such as performing a predetermined pre-production performance before the pre-production performance, providing multiple lead performances, or performing a predetermined post-production performance after the lead performance. It is.

Here, as explained in the first embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs various functions under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (the production control microcomputer 91) based on various commands sent from the main control unit 80. A performance (game performance) is executed. The performance is executed mainly in a manner according to the state of the gaming machine (gaming state). The gaming status is controlled by the main control unit 80 (gaming control microcomputer 81) (status control means), and can be roughly divided into a waiting status where identification information is displayed in a fluctuating manner and no games such as winning games are being played. (standby state), a variable game state in which a variable display of identification information is performed, and a winning game state in which a winning game is played. Further, the variable gaming states include the aforementioned state A (low probability low base state), state B (low probability high base state, high probability high base state), and state C (high probability low base state). Among these gaming states, state A is a basic gaming state (normal gaming state), and if a jackpot is won in this state A, a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game can be executed is entered. Then, depending on the type of jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot game becomes state B or state C, which is more advantageous for the player than state A. In this pachinko gaming machine 1 which can be controlled in each gaming state, the execution mode of the special performance executed based on the time measurement result by the RTC 92 differs depending on the gaming state.

That is, as mentioned above, the special performance consists of a preliminary performance (countdown performance) and a starring appearance, and when the time measured by the RTC 92 reaches a predetermined time and the execution condition (start condition) of the special performance is satisfied, the execution condition (start condition) of the special performance is satisfied. As shown in FIG. 56, first, a countdown effect is executed on the main LCD (display screen 7a) (FIG. 56(a)), and then, a countdown effect is performed on the left and right sub-LCDs (display screens 71a, 72a) and the main LCD (display screen 7a). The output is executed (FIG. 56(b)). In this way, special effects (preceding effects and starring appearances) are executed using the entire main LCD and sub-LCD display screens when the execution conditions are met (the time measured by the RTC 92 is the predetermined time). This is when the gaming state is controlled to the above-mentioned customer waiting state or state A.

On the other hand, when the gaming state when the special performance execution conditions are satisfied is controlled to the above-mentioned jackpot gaming state, state B or state C, that is, when the gaming state is controlled to be the above-mentioned jackpot gaming state, state B or state C, it is advantageous for the player compared to the normal gaming state. When controlled in a gaming state (also referred to as a "special gaming state"), special effects are not performed on the main liquid crystal but only on the sub liquid crystal. In other words, the main liquid crystal does not display the preceding effect or the effect image (special effect image) related to the lead role, and the special effect image is displayed only on the sub liquid crystal. This is because in the special game state, the effect image (effect design, background image, etc.) corresponding to the special game state is displayed on the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a). For example, in the jackpot game state, a round performance image is displayed, in state B, a performance image dedicated to the high base state (performance symbol, performance pending, background image, etc.) is displayed, and in state C, a round performance image is displayed, including during a small win game. A performance image (performance design, performance hold, background image, etc.) is displayed. In this way, in a special game state, a special performance corresponding to that special game state is executed, so if a special performance is further performed on a large scale under such a situation, the performance will become too lively and the game will not be played. There is a risk that interest will be diminished. In addition, the jackpot game state, state B, and state C do not occur unless conditions such as winning the jackpot (predetermined game conditions) are met, so you can experience the special effects performed in these game states. Opportunities can be said to be more difficult to obtain than special performances that are performed periodically. In view of this, when the gaming state is controlled to the customer waiting state or state A when the execution conditions for the special performance are satisfied (when not in the special gaming state), the main liquid crystal display is displayed as shown in FIG. The special effect image is displayed to execute the special effect, and when the machine is controlled to the jackpot game state, state B or state C (when it is in the special game state), as shown in FIG. 57(a), , special effects are executed by displaying special effects images on the sub-liquid crystal. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately display special effect images related to special effects depending on the gaming state, and even when a special effect is executed in a special gaming state, the display according to the special gaming state It becomes possible to display a special effect image without interfering with the visibility of the image.

Specifically, when a special effect is executed while being controlled in a special game state (jackpot game state, state B or state C), that is, when a special effect image is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal, FIG. 56(a) , (b) The special effect images (preceding effect images, leading appearance images) displayed on the main liquid crystal display screen 7a are reduced and displayed on the sub liquid crystal display screen. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57(a), two sub-liquid crystals, left and right, are provided, and a reduced special effect image is displayed on the display screen 72a of the right sub-liquid crystal. Therefore, if the execution conditions for the special performance are met while the jackpot gaming state is controlled in state B or state C, the current gaming state will be displayed on the main liquid crystal display screen 7a (and the left sub-liquid crystal display screen 71a). With the corresponding effect image being displayed, a countdown image is displayed on the display screen 72a of the right sub-liquid crystal, followed by a starring image. At this time, the main character image displayed on the right sub-liquid crystal (display screen 72a) is the main character image displayed on the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a) when a special effect is executed in the customer waiting state or state A. This is a reduced version. Therefore, for example, if the special performance is based on a drama series as described above, the drama video will be displayed smaller than when it is displayed on the main liquid crystal. In addition, in this embodiment, when a special effect is executed in the customer waiting state or state A, an image indicating the number of episodes is displayed on the left sub-liquid crystal (display screen 71a) and the right sub-liquid crystal (display screen 72a). " and "image indicating title" (see FIG. 56(b)) are also displayed on the right sub-liquid crystal (see FIG. 57(a)).

In addition, when displaying a special effect image on the right sub-liquid crystal (display screen 72a) in the special game state, as shown in FIG. 57(b), a display section S (reduced display section) for displaying the special effect image in a reduced size is provided in a part of the display screen 72a, and the main character image can be displayed in a reduced size on the display section S. In other words, the special effect image can be displayed like a so-called "wipe screen." In the special game state, an effect image corresponding to the special game state may be displayed not only on the main liquid crystal but also on the sub-liquid crystal, and this is to avoid disturbing the display of the effect image.

In addition, the special effect image is displayed on the right sub-liquid crystal (display screen 72a) in the special game state because the jackpot game state, state B, and state C are all right-handed states in which the game is played with the right hand. This is because the player's consciousness tends to turn to the right side rather than the center of the game board. Further, a display section S (reduced display section) for displaying the special effect image in a reduced size may be provided, for example, in a part (for example, the lower right part) of the main liquid crystal display screen 7a.

[Preview performance]
Next, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first preview performance, the second preview performance, and the third preview performance related to the display result of the variable display of identification information (special symbols and/or performance symbols) are provided. It has a performance. The first preview performance is a suggestion (suggestion performance) that suggests the possibility (jackpot reliability) that the display result of the currently running variable display will be a jackpot mode (specific display result), and the second preview performance is This is a suggestion that the reliability of the jackpot of the currently running fluctuating display is high (high expectation performance), and the third preview performance is such that the display result of the currently running fluctuating display is a jackpot (specific display result). It is something that suggests something (specific suggestive performance). These first preview performance, second preview performance, and third preview performance are all preview performances related to the currently running variation display (also referred to as "the variation"), and are the preview performance patterns set in S4506 described above. This is a type of "notice of such change" that can be executed based on the above. Note that the first preview performance, the second preview performance, and the third preview performance may all be included in the variable performance pattern set in S4505 described above.

In this embodiment, among the first preview performance, the second preview performance, and the third preview performance, the first preview performance can be executed when the gaming state is controlled to state A (low probability low base state). This is assumed to be true, and is not executed when the control is in state B (high base state) or in state C (high certainty low base state). On the other hand, the second preview performance and the third preview performance can be executed in all game states: state A (low probability low base state), state B (high base state), and state C (high probability low base state). . That is, there is a possibility that the first preview performance will be executed in the performance mode A or B, and there is no possibility that it will be executed in the other performance modes. On the other hand, the second preview performance and the third preview performance may be executed in any of the performance modes A to E.

The first preview performance is executed by displaying a suggestion image that suggests the level of jackpot reliability on a predetermined display screen, and the display mode (display content) of the suggestion image is one step in a predetermined order. It is possible to change in stages from to multiple stages (also called "stage performance"). In this embodiment, the display mode of the suggestion image can change up to the third stage at most. At the beginning of the first preview performance, the suggestion image is displayed in the first stage display mode, and the display mode of the suggestion image changes step by step, and the higher the stage, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. ing. From this, the first preview performance includes a low reliability pattern that ends at the first stage, a medium reliability pattern that progresses to the second stage and ends, and a high reliability pattern that progresses to the third stage and ends. If the first preview effect is to be executed, one of these patterns is set in S4506 described above. In addition, the stage performance as the first preview performance may be one that can change up to two stages or one that can change four or more stages, and the number of stages should be determined as appropriate depending on the performance time (performance time) of the variable performance. I can do it.

In addition, the first preview performance may be performed outside the execution period of the special performance (RTC performance) mentioned above (when the special performance period has not occurred), or during the execution period of the special performance (when the special performance period has occurred). The mode of execution (display mode) differs depending on when the program is executed (while the program is running). In other words, when the first preview performance is executed outside the execution period of the special performance, the first preview performance is transferred from two sub liquid crystals (second image display device 71, third image display device 72) to one main liquid crystal display. (first image display device 7) to display a first suggestion image that can be displayed, and the display mode of the first suggestion image can change from the first stage to the third stage. It has become. On the other hand, when the first preview performance is executed during the execution period of the special performance, the first preview performance is displayed on each of one sub liquid crystal (second image display device 71 or third image display device 72) and main liquid crystal. The execution is performed by displaying a second suggestion image that can be displayed in the second suggestion image, and the display mode of the two second suggestion images can change from the first stage to the third stage.

Therefore, when executing the first preview performance, the pattern of the first preview performance (also referred to as the "first preview performance pattern") depending on whether or not the special performance is executed (execution status) at that time is determined by the above-mentioned S4506. It is set in That is, among the aforementioned low reliability patterns, medium reliability patterns, and high reliability patterns, patterns corresponding to outside the execution period of the special performance and patterns corresponding to the execution period of the special performance are provided in advance. Any one of these patterns is set depending on the situation when executing the first preview performance. The first preview performance that is performed outside the special performance execution period is also referred to as the "normal first preview performance," and the first preview performance that is performed during the special performance execution period is also referred to as the "special first preview performance." Also called a preview performance.

Here, FIG. 60 shows an example of a table (first preview performance determination table) that is referred to when determining the first preview performance pattern set in S4506. As shown in the figure, the first preview performance determination table sets the first preview performance pattern to "1st stage (low reliability)", "1st stage (low reliability)", " The data structure is such that it is possible to determine either "1st → 2nd stage (medium reliability)" or "1st → 2nd → 3rd stage (high reliability)". Specifically, a random number value for determining the preview performance is assigned to each special symbol variation pattern that involves the execution of the first preview performance according to the determination type of the first preview performance pattern. In this embodiment, since the random number range of the random number for determining the preview effect is "0 to 99", random numbers (determination data) are assigned within the range of "0 to 99".

FIG. 60(a) is a table to be referred to when executing the first preview performance based on the jackpot variation when the result of the first special symbol validity determination is a jackpot. Further, FIG. 60(b) is a table to be referred to when executing the first notice effect in the case where the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is a failure. In addition, the first preview performance pattern is determined according to the result of the first special symbol validity determination because the first preview performance can be executed in state A (low probability low base state), and state A is the first preview performance pattern. 1. This is because this is a gaming state in which a variable display of special symbols is mainly performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the second special symbol validity determination is executed in state A, the first preview performance is not executed (unexecutable) based on the determination result.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), when the result of the first special symbol validity determination is a jackpot and the first preview performance is executed based on the jackpot variation, the first preview performance ends at the first stage, which is a low reliability No pattern is selected, and a medium-reliability pattern that progresses to two stages and ends, or a high-reliability pattern that progresses to three stages and ends, is selected. Furthermore, the possibility that the high reliability pattern (1st stage → 2nd stage → 3rd stage) will be selected (selection rate) is higher than the medium reliability pattern (1st stage → 2nd stage). In addition, when executing the first preview performance with jackpot fluctuations, the medium reliability pattern or high reliability pattern is selected when the fluctuation pattern is "P1". This is because the variation time of the variation pattern "P1" is relatively long, 120 seconds (see Figure 9), and the time required to change the display mode of the suggestion image (first suggestion image or second suggestion image) by two or more steps. This is because the display mode of the first suggestion image can be changed safely.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 60(b), when the result of the first special symbol validity judgment is a failure and the first notice performance is executed based on the failure variation, the low reliability pattern (1st stage) is selected most. The selection rate decreases (is difficult to be selected) in the order of medium reliability patterns (1st stage → 2nd stage) and high reliability patterns (1st stage → 2nd stage → 3rd stage). In addition, when executing the first notice effect with a deviation variation, if the variation pattern is "P6" or "P10", the medium reliability pattern and the high reliability pattern are not selected, and only the low reliability pattern is selected. When the pattern is "P5" or "P9", the high reliability pattern is not selected and the low reliability pattern or medium reliability pattern is selected. ”, a low reliability pattern, a medium reliability pattern, or a high reliability pattern is selected. In the case of the fluctuation patterns "P6" and "P10", the fluctuation time is 30 seconds (see Figure 9), so within that time, the medium reliability pattern (1st stage → 2nd stage) and the high reliability pattern (1st stage → 2nd stage → 3rd stage) It is difficult to perform the first preview effect, and in the case of fluctuation patterns "P5" and "P9", the fluctuation time is 45 seconds (see Figure 9), so the time This is because it is difficult to perform the first preview performance using a highly reliable pattern (1st stage → 2nd stage → 3rd stage) within the same period. In addition, in the case of fluctuation patterns "P4" and "P8", since the fluctuation time is 120 seconds like the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern "P1" (see Figure 9), low reliability patterns (1 stage), medium reliability patterns This is because the display mode of the suggestion image can be safely changed for both the reliability pattern (1st stage → 2nd stage) and the high reliability pattern (1st stage → 2nd stage → 3rd stage).

In addition, in the case of a deviation variation, the first notice effect can be executed if the variation time is 30 seconds or more, and the variation patterns "P7" (variation time 12 seconds) and " P11'' (variation time 4 seconds), the first preview effect is not executed. This is because sufficient execution time for the first preview effect cannot be secured.

In this embodiment, the first preview performance (usually the first preview performance) is executed outside the special performance execution period (normal performance period), and the first preview performance is executed within the special performance execution period (special performance period). The same first preview performance determination table is used when performing a preview performance (special first preview performance). Then, image data for the first preview performance is read out depending on whether or not the special performance is to be executed (normal performance period or special performance period) when the first preview performance is executed, and the image data for the first preview performance (normal performance period) based on the image data is read out. (first preview performance or special first preview performance). However, the first preview performance determination table may be different between the normal performance period and the special performance period. That is, a first preview performance determination table for the normal performance period and a first preview performance determination table for the special performance period are provided, and whether or not the special performance is executed when the first preview performance is executed (normal performance period or special performance period) is provided. The table to be referenced may be set depending on the presentation period). When the tables are separated in this way, it is possible to make the appearance rate (appearance mode) of the first preview performance pattern different between the normal performance period and the special performance period, and the appearance mode of the first preview performance pattern can be varied. It becomes possible to

Here, the execution mode (performance mode) of the normal first preview performance and the special first preview performance will be explained. First, the first preview effect is usually executed by displaying a effect image 300 imitating a shooting star (also referred to as a "shooting star image 300") as a first suggestion image, as shown in FIG. As mentioned above, the execution mode of the first preview performance (first preview performance pattern) includes a low reliability pattern in which the first preview performance ends at the first stage, and a medium reliability pattern in which it progresses to the second stage and ends. There are three patterns: a high reliability pattern that progresses to three stages and ends. Corresponding to this, the display mode of the shooting star image 300 (first suggestion image) includes a display mode corresponding to the first stage (first display mode) and a display mode corresponding to the second stage (second display mode). mode) and a display mode corresponding to the third stage (third display mode). In FIG. 58, the upper row is the first stage, the middle row is the second stage, and the lower row is the third stage.

Normally, in the first preview performance, from the sub liquid crystals (second image display device 71, third image display device 72) on both the left and right sides outside the gaming area, to the main liquid crystal (first image display device) located approximately in the center of the board inside the gaming area. 7) An effect display showing a shooting star flying towards the target is performed using the shooting star image 300. That is, in the first stage (first display mode) of the first preview effect, as shown in the upper part of FIG. The shooting star image 300 is not displayed on the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a).

Normally, in the second stage (second display mode) of the first preview performance, as shown in the middle part of FIG. ), and the shooting star image 300 is displayed in such a manner that it moves (flows) to both left and right sides of the main liquid crystal display screen 7a.

Normally, in the third stage (third display mode) of the first preview performance, as shown in the lower part of FIG. ), and the shooting star image 300 is displayed in a flying manner (flowing) over almost the entire main liquid crystal display screen 7a.

In this way, the display location (display position) of the shooting star image 300 related to the first preview performance is usually approximately the entirety of the left and right sub-LCD display screens 71a, 72a, and a part of the central main LCD display screen 7a ( (left and right sides) or substantially the entire area. The display location (display position) of this shooting star image 300 is also referred to as a "first display section."

In this embodiment, when the normal first notice effect is performed in two or more stages, that is, when the normal first notice effect is performed using a medium reliability pattern or a high reliability pattern, the normal first notice effect is a so-called "pseudo It is executed in conjunction with the fluctuating performance by "Ren". Pseudo-continuation (pseudo-continuation effect) is to display the effect pattern 8 in a variable manner during a single variable display of the special symbol, and then temporarily stop (temporary stop) in a stop display mode other than the zero number (predetermined random number). This is a variable effect in which the operation of displaying the effect pattern 8 again in a variable manner is repeated a predetermined number of times. Shooting star images 300 (first suggestion images) at each stage are displayed from the start of each variable display constituting the pseudo series until the first stop symbol stops (temporarily stops).

Specifically, for example, as a fluctuating performance based on a pseudo series performance pattern, after the start of the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 8, an initial (first) temporary stop is performed, followed by a second fluctuating display (pseudo). 2) is performed, a second temporary stop is performed, and this is followed by a third fluctuation display (pseudo 3). When the first preview performance is performed, the shooting star image 300 is displayed in the first stage display mode from the start of the fluctuating display of the performance pattern 8 until the first (first) temporary stop is performed (upper row of FIG. 58), and a pseudo The shooting star image 300 is displayed in the second-stage display mode from the start of pseudo 3 until the second temporary stop is performed (the middle row of FIG. The shooting star image 300 is displayed in the third stage display mode until the production execution time (lower stage of FIG. 58). As described above, in this embodiment, when the first preview performance is performed in two or more stages, the first preview performance is normally performed in conjunction with the fluctuating performance of the pseudo series, and the first preview performance is performed in accordance with the progress of the pseudo series. The stage of the first preview performance is usually increased. By combining such a pseudo series and the normal first preview performance, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the variable performance and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, the normal first preview performance based on a low reliability pattern (ending at the first stage) is executed in conjunction with a pseudo-connection fluctuating performance, and in conjunction with a non-pseudo-connection fluctuating performance (non-pseudo-connection performance). There may be one or both of these cases. Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is assumed that two or more stages of the normal first preview performance are executed in conjunction with the fluctuating performance of the pseudo-sequence, but two or more stages of the normal first preview performance are performed in conjunction with the fluctuating performance that is not a pseudo-sequence. may be executed. In this case, for example, from the start of the variation of the performance symbol until the first stop symbol stops (temporary stop), multiple performances from the first stage performance to the multiple stage performance are performed in a predetermined order. A first preview performance can normally be executed as a "step-up preview performance" that is executed in stages. Furthermore, in addition to the mode in which the display mode of the shooting star image 300 is changed in stages, the execution mode (performance mode) of the first preview effect is, for example, a mode in which the display mode of the shooting star image 300 is changed stepwise, as well as a mode in which the first suggestion image is displayed from the sub liquid crystal to the main liquid crystal ( A background image that can be displayed (straddling) is provided, and the color change of the background image (for example, blue → green → red, etc.) usually indicates the stage (progress) of the first preview performance, and the background image can be further moved and displayed. It is possible to adopt a mode in which the stage (progress) of the first preview effect is normally indicated by the amount of movement (the proportion of the display screen of the main liquid crystal). Alternatively, characters and items corresponding to the stage of the first preview presentation are normally determined in advance, and a specific image (specific image) representing the character or item is displayed on the image display device as the first suggestion image. good.

When the first preview effect is normally performed up to the third stage as described above, that is, when the display mode of the first suggestion image changes to the third display mode, the third stage is reached (the third display mode is changed to At a timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the change), a second preview performance (high expectation performance) is executed. The second preview performance of this embodiment mainly consists of a movable performance in which the movable decoration member 14 is operated, and accompanying this movable performance, a predetermined sound effect is generated or lamps are emitted. In the second preview effect (movable effect), the movable decorative member 14 falls from the standby position and appears on the near side (display side) of the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a), and remains in this state for several seconds (for example, 3 seconds). After holding it, it returns (returns) to the standby position.

In addition to being mainly a movable effect, the second preview effect mainly consists of a display effect that displays a predetermined preview image on the display screen of an image display device, or generates a predetermined sound effect (output from a speaker). ) It can mainly consist of a sound production, or it can mainly consist of a light production in which illumination members such as panel lamps and frame lamps emit light in a predetermined light emission mode, and it can be composed of a combination of two or more of these. You can also do that.

Furthermore, in addition to the cases in which the second preview performance is performed after the execution of the first preview performance, as described below, the second preview performance may be performed after the execution of a special first preview performance, or it may be performed independently of the execution of the first preview performance. There are cases where it is performed independently at a predetermined time during a fluctuating performance (for example, when the performance develops). Therefore, the first preview performance (normal first preview performance or special first preview performance) may or may not be executed before the second preview performance. Therefore, for the player, when the first preview performance is executed, he/she will have a sense of expectation for the subsequent execution (occurrence) of the second preview performance, and thereby the first preview performance (suggestive performance) This makes it possible to increase players' interest in the game.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first preview effect is normally performed up to the third stage and the display mode of the shooting star image 300 (first suggestion image) changes to the third display mode, and then a predetermined period of time has elapsed. , a second preview performance (high expectation performance) is executed. Multiple types of times are set in advance as predetermined times that determine the execution timing of the second preview performance, and normally when the high expectation pattern is selected as the pattern of the first preview performance, the second preview performance is executed. Any one of a plurality of types of time is selected as the predetermined time until. In this embodiment, three types of predetermined time are provided: "10 seconds", "25 seconds", and "40 seconds", and any one of them is selected. In the case where the variable performance that usually accompanies the execution of the first preview performance of the high expectation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation, a relatively long time is more likely to be selected as the predetermined time until the execution of the second preview performance than a short time, In the case of outlier fluctuations, on the contrary, relatively short times are more likely to be selected than long times. As a result, the time normally required from the time the first preview effect is performed up to the third stage (after the display mode of the first suggestion image changes to the third display mode) until the second preview effect is executed (a predetermined amount of time) The longer the time), the higher the reliability of the jackpot.

Normally, when the first preview effect is performed up to the third stage (when the display mode of the first suggestion image changes to the third display mode), the period from there until the second preview effect is executed (occurs), An image showing the passage of time is displayed on the main liquid crystal display screen 7a. In this embodiment, as an image showing the passage of time, a timer image 400 showing in a countdown format the remaining time until the second preview effect is executed (occurs) is displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in the lower part of FIG. displayed at the top center of the page. For this reason, when a variable performance is performed during the normal performance period, first, the player is made to pay attention to whether or not the first preview performance (suggestive performance) will normally be executed in the variable performance, and the first preview performance is normally executed. When executed, the player is made to pay attention to the display mode of the shooting star image 300 (first suggestion image) in the first normal preview effect, and when the display mode of the shooting star image 300 becomes the third display mode, It is possible to draw the player's attention to the timer image 400 indicating the remaining time from the time until the second preview performance (high expectation performance) is executed. As a result, it becomes possible to effectively increase the expectations of players who are looking forward to the execution (occurrence) of the second preview performance (high expectation performance) that suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is relatively high. It is possible to improve the game interest when no performance period is occurring (during the normal performance period).

Incidentally, the timer image 400 may show the elapsed time until the second preview effect is executed (occurred) in a count-up format. In this case, based on the specification (playability) that the longer the time (predetermined time) it takes to execute the second preview effect, the higher the jackpot reliability is, how much the time shown by the timer image 400 advances ( This makes it possible to draw the attention of players to crabs (elongated) and effectively increase the expectations of the players. Also, the time usually elapses from the time the first preview effect is performed up to the third stage (after the display mode of the first suggestion image changes to the third display mode) until the second preview effect is executed (occurs). The image showing the progress does not have to be a timer image like in this example. If it is possible to make the player aware of the time it takes to execute the second preview effect, the image showing the elapsed time may be displayed in the form of a meter, for example. Various images can be employed, such as an image shown in an hourglass format or an image shown in an hourglass format.

Next, the special first preview performance will be explained. As shown in FIG. 59, the special first preview performance displays a character image 500 consisting of the words "in preparation" and a horizontal bar-shaped gauge image 600 indicating the progress of the special first preview performance as second suggestion images. It is executed by The character image 500 is displayed at the bottom left of the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal (image display device 7), and the gauge image 600 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 71a of the left sub-liquid crystal (second image display device 71). All of these images are displayed in a manner that does not impair the visibility of the special effect image or the effect of the special effect that is being executed on each display screen. Further, while the special first notice effect is being executed, the display positions of the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 do not change (fixed) until the effect ends. This is also to prevent the visibility and presentation effect of the special presentation (special presentation image) from being impaired.

As mentioned above, the first preview performance pattern has three types: a low reliability pattern (1st stage), a medium reliability pattern (1st stage → 2nd stage), and a high reliability pattern (1st stage → 2nd stage → 3rd stage). (see FIG. 60), the display mode of the second suggestion image consisting of the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 also includes a display mode corresponding to the first stage (first display mode) and a display mode corresponding to the second stage. A display mode corresponding to the second stage (second display mode) and a display mode corresponding to the third stage (third display mode) are provided. In FIG. 59, the upper row is the first stage, the middle row is the second stage, and the lower row is the third stage. In addition, when the normal first notice performance is performed in two or more stages, the normal first notice performance was to be executed in conjunction with the pseudo-sequence variable performance, but for the special first notice performance, the pseudo-sequence It is executed in conjunction with a fluctuating performance (non-pseudo-connected performance). During the special performance period, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 59, the performance pattern 8 is displayed in a small size at the lower right corner of the main liquid crystal display screen 7a, and a special performance is executed in which the special performance image is mainly displayed. This is because the pseudo-series using the performance pattern 8 has poor performance effect, and therefore, the pseudo-series (pseudo-series performance) is not performed.

In the special first preview effect, the display mode of the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 gradually changes as the execution time of the effect passes. That is, when the first special preview effect starts, at the time of the start, the characters "preliminary," "preparation," and "chu" that make up the character image 500 are displayed in a colorless and semi-transparent color that makes up the character image 500, and the gauge image 600 is Displayed when the gauge amount is zero. As the first special preview performance progresses (time elapses), the character for ``semi'' among ``semi'', ``bi'', and ``chu'' gradually changes from colorless and translucent to colored and opaque. When it becomes completely colored and opaque and becomes clearly visible, the first stage of the special first preview performance is completed. At this time, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 59, among the character images 500 for "in preparation", the character "semi" is displayed in colored opaque (for example, opaque red), and the remaining characters "bi" and "chu" are displayed in opaque color (for example, opaque red). The characters are still displayed in a colorless and semi-transparent state, and the gauge amount of the gauge image 600 is displayed in a state where it has progressed to about 1/3 (first display mode). In FIG. 59, the colorless and semi-transparent characters among the characters "in preparation" are shown in white. When the special first notice effect is executed in a low reliability pattern, when the display mode of the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 becomes the first stage display mode (first display mode) shown in the upper row of FIG. 59, from then on, The display mode does not change, and thereafter, the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 are erased from the screen, and the special first preview performance ends at the first stage. The variable display of the performance symbols 8 ends at approximately the same timing as the end of this special first preview performance or at a later timing.

Furthermore, when the special first preview effect reaches the second stage, as shown in the middle part of FIG. The remaining characters "medium" are still displayed as colorless and semi-transparent, and the gauge image 600 is displayed with the gauge amount advanced to about 2/3 (second display mode). When the special first notice effect is executed in the medium reliability pattern, when the display mode of the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 becomes the second stage display mode (second display mode) shown in the middle row of FIG. 59, from then on, The display mode does not change, and thereafter, the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 are erased from the screen, and the special first preview performance ends at the second stage. The variable display of the performance symbols 8 ends at approximately the same timing as the end of this special first preview performance or at a later timing.

Furthermore, when the special first preview effect reaches the third stage, as shown in the lower part of FIG. (for example, opaque red), and the gauge amount of the gauge image 600 is displayed in a full state (third display mode). When the special first notice effect is executed in a highly reliable pattern, when the display mode of the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 reaches the third stage display mode (third display mode) shown in the lower part of FIG. The first preview performance ends, and thereafter, the second preview performance (high expectation performance) is executed. This second preview performance is the same type of performance as the case where it is executed at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed after the above-described normal first preview performance has been performed up to the third stage. In other words, this is a preview performance mainly consisting of a movable performance in which the movable decorative member 14 is moved. In addition, when the second preview performance is executed after the above-mentioned normal first preview performance, the second preview performance is usually executed at a timing when a predetermined period of time has passed after the first preview performance has been performed up to the third stage. However, the second preview performance, which is executed after the special first preview performance, is performed after the special first preview performance has been performed up to the third stage (the display mode of the second suggestion image is changed to the third stage). It is executed at the timing when a predetermined period of time (after the display mode changes) has elapsed. Therefore, the second preview performance (high expectation performance) that is executed after the first preview performance has been performed up to the third stage will be in the same manner (performance) regardless of whether the special performance period has occurred or not. content). Thereby, it becomes possible to make the second preview performance (high expectation performance) executed after the first preview performance common, and to make the performance easy to understand for the player.

In this way, the display locations (display positions) of the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 related to the special first preview effect are a part (lower part) of the display screen 71a of the left sub-LCD and the display screen 7a of the central main LCD. (lower left). The display locations (display positions) of these character images 500 and gauge images 600 are also referred to as a "second display section."

In addition, when the second preview performance is executed after the first special preview performance, the timer image indicating the remaining time until the execution (occurrence) of the second preview performance is displayed on the sub-LCD (second image display device 71, third It is not displayed on either the display screen of the image display device 72) or the main liquid crystal (first image display device 7). During the special performance period when the first special preview performance is performed, the special performance (display of special performance images) is performed using the sub-LCD and main LCD, and the visibility and performance effects of the special performance are improved. This is to prevent damage to the However, this image is different from the timer image 400 (see FIG. 58) when the second preview performance is normally executed after the first preview performance, and is an image that suggests the execution (occurrence) timing of the second preview performance. may be displayed on either the left or right sub-liquid crystal. Specifically, for example, a count image, which is an image smaller than the timer image 400 and indicates the period until the second preview effect is executed by counting up or down with numbers, is displayed, and the value indicated by the count image is displayed. The second preview effect may be executed when the value reaches a predetermined value. In this case, the count image may be displayed within a range that does not impair the visibility or performance effect of the special performance.

In addition, when the second preview performance is executed after the special first preview performance, the timing when the special first preview performance has been performed up to the third stage (the timing when the display mode of the second suggestion image becomes the third display mode) ), the second preview effect may be executed (occurred). This is because there is no need to display an image (timer image 400, etc.) indicating the period until the second preview effect is executed, and there is no need to provide an image for that purpose.

Furthermore, when the second preview performance is executed after the special first preview performance, that is, when the second preview performance is performed during the special performance period, the mode of the second preview performance is changed to the normal first preview performance. It may be different from the case where the second preview performance is executed after passing through, that is, the case where the second preview performance is executed during the normal performance period. For example, as the second preview performance during the special performance period, an image depicting the falling movable decorative member 14 (movable performance depiction image) or other images suggesting that the reliability of the jackpot is high (high expectation level image) may be used. may be displayed in a small size on a part of the display screen of the sub liquid crystal or main liquid crystal on which the special effect image is displayed. In this case, for example, a reduced display section such as the aforementioned display section S (see FIG. 57(b)) is provided on a part of the display screen of the sub liquid crystal or main liquid crystal on which the special effect image is displayed. The display unit can be configured to display movable performance depiction images, high expectation images, and the like. Alternatively, instead of making the second preview performance that is executed during the special performance period something that appeals to the player's visual sense (visual performance), such as a moving performance that is performed as the second preview performance during the normal performance period. A special sound effect may be temporarily generated (outputted) to appeal to the player's auditory senses (auditory effect). By employing these configurations, it becomes possible to execute the second preview performance (high expectation performance) without impairing the visibility or performance effect of the special performance being executed as much as possible. In this way, by differentiating the form (performance content) of the second preview performance between the normal performance period and the special performance period, the second preview performance can be performed in a form (performance content) suitable for each of the normal performance period and the special performance period. It becomes possible to perform the performance. As a result, it is possible to differentiate the second preview performance (high expectation performance) that is executed after the first preview performance has been performed up to the third stage, and the difference can attract players' interest. It becomes possible.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first preview performance can be executed in different manners during the normal performance period and the special performance period. For this reason, the form of the first preview performance (performance content) may be different between the normal performance period and the special performance period, or the suggestive performance may be executed in a form (performance content) suitable for each of the normal performance period and the special performance period. It becomes possible to do things such as Thereby, it is possible to enhance the effects of both the special performance (display of the special performance image) and the first preview performance, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the first preview performance (normally the first preview performance) is executed during the normal performance period, the first preview performance includes a shooting star image 300 (which can change the display mode as the stage progresses). The first suggestion image) is displayed partially or entirely on the left and right sub-liquid crystal display screens 71a, 72a and the central main liquid crystal display screen 7a. On the other hand, when the first preview performance (special first preview performance) is executed during the special performance period, the first preview performance includes a character image 500 and a gauge image 600 (the first preview performance) whose display mode can change as the stage progresses. 2) is partially displayed on the display screen 71a of the left sub-liquid crystal and the display screen 7a of the central main liquid crystal, and in this case, the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 are usually It is displayed smaller than the shooting star image 300 related to the effect, and the display range (display ratio) occupying the display screen is also smaller. For this reason, in the first preview performance executed during the normal performance period, the shooting star image 300 (first suggestion image) is prominently displayed to draw the player's attention to the display mode (that is, the normal first preview performance). On the other hand, in the first preview performance executed during the special performance period, the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 (second suggestion image) are displayed modestly so as not to spoil the performance by the special performance image (special performance). At the same time, it becomes possible to suggest the jackpot reliability of the fluctuation. Thereby, it becomes possible to execute preview performances with different impressions during the normal performance period and the special performance period, and it becomes possible to attract the interest of the player to the difference and improve the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the first preview performance is a staged performance in which the display mode (display content) of the suggestive images can be changed step by step from one stage to multiple stages according to a predetermined order. As time passes, the type of suggestion image (character, item, etc.) displayed in the first preview performance is changed, the display position of the suggestion image is changed, etc. to suggest the jackpot reliability of the change. As long as it can be done, the mode of presentation does not matter.

Next, Example 3 of the present invention will be described. The third embodiment provides a preview performance function based on the preliminary judgment result of special drawing reservation (pre-reading of reservation) regarding the special performance (RTC performance) that can be executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 equipped with the RTC function of the second embodiment described above. It was added.

Here, in the above-described second embodiment, it was possible to execute the third preview performance (specific suggestion performance) that suggests that the display result of the variable display currently being executed will be a jackpot mode (specific display result). In other words, the third preview performance could be executed as a preview performance (jackpot announcement performance) with 100% jackpot reliability. This third preview effect may, for example, display a predetermined preview image (jackpot confirmation image) suggesting a confirmation of a jackpot on the image display device, or generate a sound effect (jackpot confirmation sound) suggesting a confirmation of a jackpot (through a speaker). This can be done by outputting from

In the above-mentioned Example 2, the third notice performance was said to be executable as "the relevant change notice", but in the present Example 3, in addition to that, it is possible to perform the third notice performance based on the preliminary determination result of special drawing reservation (pre-reading of reservation). It is said that it can also be executed as a "pending advance notice." The third preview performance as the pending advance notice can be executed in cooperation with the special performance (RTC performance). In the third embodiment, the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 executes the special performance related processing (S4301) shown in FIG. 61 as control related to the execution of the third preview performance. The special performance related process (S4301) of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 61 replaces the special performance related process (S4301) of the second embodiment shown in FIG. The special performance related processing (S4301) of the third embodiment will be explained below.

In addition, in the following, for configurations that differ from Examples 1 and 2, different symbols and step numbers will be used, and for common configurations, the same symbols and step numbers as in Examples 1 and 2 will be used. That's it. Furthermore, in the following description, it will be assumed that the third preview performance (specific suggestion performance) consists of a sound performance (specific sound performance) in which a predetermined jackpot confirmation sound is output from the speaker 67.

[Special performance related processing of Example 3]
Among the special effect-related processes (S4301) shown in FIG. The explanation of is omitted.

If it is determined in S5001 that the special performance execution flag is not OFF (ON) (NO in S5001), that is, if the special performance is being executed (during the special performance period), it is the timing for the preceding performance to end. It is determined whether or not (S5005). As mentioned above, the special performance (RTC performance) provided in this pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of a preceding performance and a starring appearance, and when the preceding performance ends, the starring appearance is subsequently performed (started). It becomes. The advance effect is configured as a countdown effect that displays a countdown until the main character's appearance starts, and the number in the number image 200 (countdown image) is counted down one by one (see FIG. 56(a)). ). In S5005, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the countdown display in the countdown performance becomes "0" (timing at which the advance performance ends). This determination can be made, for example, by the sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91), which activates a timer that measures the execution time of the preceding production, triggered by the start of the preceding production (transmission of a special production start command). This can be done by referring to As mentioned above, the advance performance (countdown performance) starts about 5 seconds before the start of the lead performance, so the execution time of the advance performance is about 5 seconds, and the end timing is when the 5 seconds have passed. Alternatively, the sub-control board 90 and the image control board 100 are connected to enable bidirectional communication, and the image control microcomputer 101 monitors the countdown status of the numeric image 200 (countdown image), and the number indicated by the numeric image 200 is is configured to output a signal indicating this (feedback signal) to the sub-control unit 90 when the value becomes "0", and the end timing of the preceding performance can be determined based on the input of the signal. .

If it is determined in S5005 that it is not the end timing of the advance performance (NO in S5005), the present process is finished without performing the processes from S5006 onwards. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the preceding performance (YES in S5005), the performance pending information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is accessed and the stored content (performance pending information) is checked (S5006). As mentioned above, the effect pending information storage area (obtained information storage means) stores information such as the preliminary judgment result and hit type included in the starting ball entry command transmitted from the main control unit 80 as effect pending information. , its storage content (performance suspension information) matches the storage content (acquisition information) of the special symbol suspension storage section (first special symbol suspension storage section, second special symbol suspension storage section) of the main control section 80. Therefore, by checking the storage contents (performance suspension information) of the production suspension information storage area, it is possible to determine the currently stored preliminary determination result of special symbol suspension.

Here, as mentioned above, the performance hold information includes special figure 1 effect hold information corresponding to the first special figure hold and special figure 2 effect hold information corresponding to the second special figure hold. The information storage area includes a special figure 1 effect pending information storage area that stores special figure 1 effect pending information, and a special figure 2 effect pending information storage area that stores special figure 2 effect pending information. In S5006, the object of the effect pending information to be checked is switched to special figure 1 effect pending information or special figure 2 effect pending information according to the gaming state at that time. Specifically, when the gaming state is state A or state B, the special figure 1 effect pending information is checked, and when the gaming state is state C, the special figure 2 effect pending information is checked. This is because states A and B are gaming states in which the first special symbol is primarily displayed in a variable manner, and state C is a gaming state in which the second special symbol is primarily displayed in a variable manner.

Next, in S5007, as a result of the check in S5006, it is determined whether the performance pending information stored in the performance pending information storage area includes performance pending information (specific performance pending information) whose preliminary determination result is a jackpot. In other words, it is determined whether or not a jackpot pending (obtained information in which the display result of the variable display is the specific display result) is stored (S5007). Here, the jackpot types include "15R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "4R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot", "15R 5th jackpot", "2R 6th jackpot", and There is a "2R 7th jackpot". Among these, in the 2R 6th jackpot and 2R 7th jackpot, the amount of prize balls that the player can acquire is smaller than other jackpots, and the game state is advantageous for the player, which is state C (high probability low base state). Since it is a jackpot that triggers the end of the game, it is not subject to determination in S5007. In other words, the 2R 6th jackpot and 2R 7th jackpot are not subject to the 3rd preview performance, and even if the jackpot reservation (2R jackpot reservation) of the 2R 6th jackpot and 2R 7th jackpot were stored. Also, the third preview performance based on this will not be executed (unexecutable). If this is the target of the third preview performance, it will be disadvantageous for the player, such as not being able to obtain a large amount of prize balls or ending state C (high accuracy low base state) even though the third preview performance has been executed. This is because there is a risk that a situation may occur that may offend the player.

Therefore, in S5007, "15R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "4R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot", or " 15R 5th jackpot" is stored, it is determined that the jackpot is stored (YES in S5007), and either no jackpot is stored (only the missed jackpot) or the jackpot is stored. If the hold is 2R jackpot hold, it is determined that jackpot hold is not stored (NO in S5007). If it is determined that the jackpot pending is not stored (NO in S5007), this process is finished without performing the processing from S5008 onwards, and if it is determined that the jackpot pending is stored (YES in S5007), the 3 Execute the preview performance (output the jackpot confirmation sound) and finish this process.

By executing the third preview performance (specific suggestion performance) through the process of S5008, a jackpot confirmation sound is generated (output from the speaker 67) at the timing when the countdown display in the countdown performance becomes "0" (timing when the advance performance ends). ). Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the jackpot reservation is included in the special figure reservations stored at that time. As a result, when a special performance is executed (started), the player is made to pay attention to whether or not the third preview performance (specific suggestion performance) will be executed before the start of the main character appearance that makes up the special performance. It becomes possible to improve the interest in the game. In particular, the advance performance that is performed before the lead role is a countdown performance, and the countdown performance indicates the remaining period until the lead role starts, but when the third preview performance is performed, also indicates the remaining period until its execution (the countdown of the third preview performance), and the player assumes that the timing when the countdown display reaches "0" (timing of the end of the advance performance) is the execution timing of the third preview performance. can also be recognized. As a result, it is possible to increase the excitement of the players as the countdown performance approaches its end, and to increase the excitement during the period from the start of the special performance to the start of the lead role (particularly the excitement when the countdown performance ends). It is possible to increase it.

In addition, if the gaming state when the third preview performance is executed by the process of S5008 is the normal gaming state (state A), it will be executed after the execution of the third preview performance, that is, after the end of the countdown performance (preceding performance). As shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 57(b), the performance image related to the main character (main character image) may be displayed not on the main liquid crystal but on the sub-liquid crystal. It is confirmed that the gaming state will shift to the jackpot gaming state (special gaming state) when the jackpot hold is later extinguished, and the effect image corresponding to the special gaming state will eventually be displayed on the main LCD. It is from. In addition, while the main character image is displayed in a reduced size on the sub-liquid crystal, the performance display related to jackpot fluctuations (reach performance, development performance, etc.) due to the expiry of the jackpot hold will be displayed as usual (larger) on the main liquid crystal, etc. This is because it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the performance display related to the jackpot fluctuation (jackpot fluctuation performance) and increase interest.

In addition, when the third preview performance is executed by the process of S5008, the jackpot hold that triggered the execution of the third preview performance is resolved, and the jackpot symbol is confirmed to be displayed (the specific display result is derived and displayed) or Until the jackpot game starts (that is, until the jackpot occurs), even if the performance image related to the starring appearance (starring appearance image) performed after the execution of the third preview performance (after the preceding performance) is hidden (invisible). good. This is also because it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the jackpot fluctuating effect accompanying the expiry of the jackpot suspension, thereby increasing the player's interest. In this case, the main character image can be displayed (visible) with the start of the jackpot game.

Furthermore, when the third preview performance is executed through the process of S5008, a more premium performance (dedicated performance) is executed thereafter during the period until the jackpot occurs (the confirmation display of the jackpot symbol or the start of the jackpot game). Yes. In this way, it becomes possible to make the performance effect more noticeable by executing the third preview performance at the end of the countdown performance. As such a premium performance, for example, displaying a special image (dedicated image) that suggests confirmation of a pending jackpot can be mentioned.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the timing at which the third preview effect is executed by the process of S5008 is the end timing of the preceding effect, that is, the timing when the number of the number image 200 displayed as a countdown by the countdown effect becomes "0". However, the third preview performance can be executed at any timing from the start of the preceding performance (special performance) to the end of the preceding performance (within the execution period of the preceding performance). good. That is, the third preview performance may be executed at a predetermined time from when the special performance (preceding performance) is started until the preliminary performance ends based on the establishment of the special performance execution condition. For example, if the preceding performance is the aforementioned countdown performance, the third preview performance is executed at the timing when the number of the number image 200 reaches a predetermined number between "5" and "0". It can be configured as follows. With this, when a special performance is executed (started), the player is made to pay attention to whether or not the third preview performance (specific suggestive performance) will be executed before the start of the main character appearance that makes up the special performance. , it becomes possible to improve gaming interest.

In addition, when performing the third preview performance at a predetermined time from the start of the special performance (preceding performance) to the end of the preliminary performance, the execution timing (execution timing) may be determined. In this case, for example, the performance pending information was checked at the end timing of the preceding performance through the processes of S5005 and S5006 described above, but instead of this, the performance pending information is checked at the start timing of the special performance, that is, at the start timing of the preceding performance. Check. As a result, when the third preview performance is to be executed due to the jackpot pending being stored, the timing at which the third preview performance will be executed within the execution period of the preceding performance is determined by random number lottery etc. decide. As a result, the player does not know at what timing from the start of the special performance (preceding performance) to the end of the preceding performance, the third preview performance can be executed, so that the third preview performance can be executed. It is possible to further increase the interest during the advance presentation period.

In addition, in the third embodiment, as a result of the performance reservation information check in S5006, the third preview performance is executed when a jackpot suspension related to a jackpot other than the 2R jackpot is stored. Among the jackpots, when a jackpot suspension (specific jackpot suspension) related to a specific jackpot is stored, the third preview performance may be executed. Specifically, among "15R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "4R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot" and "15R 5th jackpot", the game state after the end of the jackpot game is the state A jackpot that becomes C (second gaming state), that is, a jackpot related to any of the "15R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", and "15R 5th jackpot" is suspended (the display result of the variable display is displayed in the second specific display) If the obtained information (resulting information obtained) is stored, the third preview performance is executed. In this case, the jackpot pending (display result of the fluctuation display) related to either "4R 3rd jackpot" or "4R 4th jackpot" which is a jackpot where the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game becomes state B (first gaming state) (obtained information in which the first specific display result is obtained) is stored, the third preview effect will not be executed. By doing this, at the start of the special performance, if it is certain that the player will move to state C (high probability low base state), which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player among the variable gaming states, The third preview performance will be executed before the start, and the third preview performance will foretell the confirmation of transition to state C. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to whether or not the third preview performance (specific suggestion performance) is executed when the special performance is executed. In addition, if a jackpot reservation related to either "4R 3rd jackpot" or "4R 4th jackpot" is stored, even if other preview effects are executed instead of executing the 3rd preview effect. good. In this way, depending on the type of preview performance that may be executed after the start of the special performance and before the start of the main character's appearance, it is possible to determine whether a jackpot hold that is relatively advantageous to the player is stored or a jackpot hold that is not. This makes it possible to decipherably suggest whether the This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the preview performance that may be executed before the start of the main character's appearance.

Next, Example 4 of the present invention will be described. Embodiment 4 adds a cancel function to the pachinko gaming machine 1 equipped with the RTC function of Embodiments 2 and 3 described above, which allows the player to cancel the execution of a special performance (RTC performance) at his/her will. This is what I did. To realize this cancel function, the performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 executes the special performance cancellation selection process (S4300) in the 10ms timer interrupt process (S4010) shown in FIG. The 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 62 replaces the 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) of the first and second embodiments shown in FIGS. 50 and 54. The special performance cancellation selection process (S4300) will be described below.

In addition, in the following, different codes and step numbers from Examples 1 to 3 will be used for configurations that are different from Examples 1 to 3, and the same codes and step numbers as in Examples 1 to 3 will be used for common configurations. That's it.

[Special performance cancellation selection process]
As shown in FIG. 63, in the special performance cancellation selection process (S4300), first, it is determined whether the acceptance period flag is OFF (S6001). Here, in this embodiment, in addition to the effect button 63, an operation lever (not shown) through which an operation signal is input to the sub-control board 90 is provided around the upper plate 61 of the front frame 51. This operation lever, like the production button 63, functions as an input means for the player to input. The period during which the sub-control board 90 (production control microcomputer 91) is able to process the input of the operation signal based on the operation of the operation lever as valid is the "acceptance period" (operation valid period). ). The acceptance period flag is a flag indicating whether or not the acceptance period is in progress, and is turned on when the acceptance period is in progress, and turned off when it is not in the acceptance period.

The reason why an operation lever is provided separately from the production button 63 is that the execution timing of the production based on the operation of the production button 63 (operation-compatible production) overlaps with the selection timing of execution/non-execution (cancellation) of the special production. This is due to consideration of what happened when In other words, if an operation lever is not provided, the operation of the production button 63 in a situation where these two timings overlap will be changed to either "operation compatible production" or "selection of execution/non-execution (cancellation)". It is necessary to correspond to one or both, and control becomes complicated accordingly. In order to avoid such complicated control, an operating lever is provided separately from the effect button 63.

If it is determined in S6001 that the reception period flag is not OFF (ON) (NO in S6001), the process proceeds to S6004 described later. If it is determined that the reception period flag is OFF (YES in S6001), the reception It is determined whether it is the start timing of the period (S6002). In this embodiment, the reception period is configured to occur (set) between before the time measured by the RTC 92 reaches the start time (predetermined time) of the special effect and until the start time reaches the start time. There is. Specifically, the acceptance period is 15 seconds from 30 seconds before the start time. Therefore, in S6002, it is determined whether it is 30 seconds before the start of the special performance, and if so, it is determined that it is the start timing of the reception period (YES in S6002), and if not, the reception period is It is determined that it is not the start timing (NO in S6002). Note that the start timing of the reception period and the length of the reception period are not limited to the times shown in this embodiment, and can be arbitrarily determined.

If it is determined in S6002 that it is not the start timing of the reception period (NO in S6002), this process is completed without performing the processing after S6003, and if it is determined that it is the start timing of the reception period (YES in S6002), the reception The period flag is turned ON (S6003), and the selection screen display start command is set in the sub output buffer (S6004). When the selection screen display start command is sent to the image control board 100 by the above-mentioned command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 displays a selection screen (selection image) that allows the player to select execution or cancellation of the special effect. The image data is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the selection screen is displayed on the main liquid crystal display screen 7a. At this time, if a variable performance or a jackpot game performance is being executed on the display screen 7a, a selection screen is displayed superimposed on the near side of the performance image being executed. In addition, if the current performance is a specific performance with a relatively low appearance rate (selection rate) among multiple types of predetermined performances, such as a super reach performance or a development performance, the above-mentioned wipe screen will be displayed. The selection screen may be displayed smaller than usual. Further, the display section (selection image display section) on which the selection screen is displayed does not have to be the main liquid crystal display screen 7a, but may be either the left or right sub-liquid crystal display screens 71a or 72a.

Although the selection screen is not shown here, the contents of the selection screen include, for example, if the special production is based on a drama series as mentioned above, "Do you want to watch the drama?" In addition to displaying a message image in the upper area of the screen, an image of the text "Yes" and a text image of "No" are displayed below the message image side by side, horizontally or vertically. ” or “No” can be selected and displayed. The player recognizes the occurrence (start) of a period (acceptance period) during which the player can select execution/non-execution (cancellation) of the special effect by displaying the selection screen on the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal display. is enabled, and by operating the control lever while the selection screen is displayed, that is, within the acceptance period, select "Yes" (execution of special performance) or "No" (non-execution of special performance). be able to.

In this embodiment, an operation lever is provided separately from the production button 63, and "Yes" or "No" (execution/non-execution of special production) can be selected by operating the operation lever, but the first production button It may be possible to select by operating either or both of the 63a and the second performance button 63b. Further, the input means provided separately from the production button 63 does not need to be an operation lever, and may be, for example, a touch panel, a dial type switch, or the like.

Next, in S6005, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the acceptance period (S6005). In this embodiment, as described above, the reception period is 15 seconds from 30 seconds before the start of the special performance. Therefore, in S6005, it is determined whether 15 seconds have elapsed since the start of the acceptance period (acceptance period flag ON), and if 15 seconds have elapsed, it is determined that it is the end timing of the acceptance period (YES in S6005). If not, it is determined that it is not the end timing of the reception period (NO in S6005). The determination in S6005 is made, for example, when the sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) activates a timer that measures the elapsed time of the reception period, triggered by the start of the reception period (the reception period flag is ON). This can be done by referring to the timer.

If it is determined in S6005 that it is not the end of the acceptance period (NO in S6005), the process ends without performing the processes from S6006 onwards. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the reception period (YES in S6005), it is determined whether there is an instruction to cancel the special performance scheduled to start after this (S6006). This determination is made by referring to the selection results on the selection screen described above. In other words, when the reception period ends, it is determined whether "Yes" (execution of special performance) or "No" (non-execution of special performance) was selected on the selection screen, and if "Yes" is selected, If it has been selected, it is determined that there was no instruction to cancel the special performance (NO in S6006), and if "No" has been selected, it is determined that there has been an instruction to cancel the special performance (YES in S6006).

If it is determined in S6006 that there is no instruction to cancel the special performance (NO in S6006), the process proceeds to S6009 described later, and if it is determined that there is an instruction to cancel the special performance (YES in S6006), the special performance flag is turned ON. (S6007), and sets the next special performance information command in the sub output buffer (S6008). When the next special performance information command is sent to the image control board 100 by the above-mentioned command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 sends an image corresponding to the information regarding the special performance (starring appearance) to be executed in the next cycle. The data is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the information is displayed on the display screen 72a of the right sub-liquid crystal (information display section). The information displayed at this time is the information displayed on the display screen 72a of the right sub-LCD during the normal performance period described in the second embodiment (remaining time until the start of the next special performance, information on the next special performance (starring)). content, etc.).

In this way, information regarding the next special performance is displayed based on the fact that the cancellation of the current special performance has been confirmed, so that the player does not know that the current special performance has been cancelled. At the same time, you will be able to learn about the next special performance that will be possible. This makes it possible to add a "special performance cancel function" and a "next special performance information display function" to a gaming machine equipped with an RTC function, thereby improving the convenience of the gaming machine.

In addition, the special performance cancellation flag turned ON in S6007 is a flag indicating to stop (prohibit) the execution of the current special performance, and when the special performance start time comes, the special performance will be executed (started). (before turning on the special effect execution flag) (see FIGS. 55 and 61). Then, when the special performance start time arrives (YES in S5002), if the special performance stop flag is ON, the special performance will not start (without setting the special performance start command). , ends the process related to the start of the special performance (special performance related process). As a result, the special performance that was scheduled to be performed this time will not be performed. Note that the special performance cancellation flag turns OFF when the start time of the special performance has arrived, but the special performance has not been started (executed) and that time has passed.

Next, the reception period flag turned ON in S6003 is turned OFF (S6009), a selection screen display end command is set in the sub-output buffer (S6010), and the process ends. When the selection screen display end command is sent to the image control board 100 by the above-described command sending process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 erases the above-mentioned selection screen that has been displayed up to that point. This allows the player to recognize the end of the acceptance period.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment described above, the player can use the operation lever through the selection screen displayed on the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a) during the reception period that occurs within a predetermined time before the start of the special performance. By performing the selection operation (input using the input means), it is possible to arbitrarily stop the execution of the special performance before it starts. As a result, it is possible to add a function to cancel the special effect that is periodically executed based on the time measurement result by the RTC 92, thereby improving the convenience of the gaming machine equipped with the RTC function.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment 3, if the function to cancel the special performance according to the present embodiment 4 is added, if the execution of the special performance is canceled before the execution of the special performance starts, the predetermined period from the start of the special performance to the end of the preceding performance The execution of the aforementioned third preview performance (specific suggestion performance) that may be executed at the end of the preceding performance (in the third embodiment) is also canceled. This makes it possible to set (select) the performance execution mode according to the player's preference.

Here, during the regular performance period, which is outside the execution period of the special performance (RTC performance), as described above, information regarding the special performance (starring appearance) to be performed in the next cycle (also referred to as "next special performance information") is displayed on the right sub-liquid crystal display screen 72a. That is, the remaining time until the next special performance is executed (started) and the content of the next special performance (starring) are displayed on the display screen 72a of the right sub-liquid crystal. This next special performance information is, in principle, displayed until the lead role that constitutes the special performance is executed (started). However, depending on the performance mode of the variable performance executed during the normal performance period (including the performance mode of the preview performance if it involves the execution of a preview performance), the display content (display) on the right sub-LCD (display screen 72a) aspect) may change.

Specifically, depending on the performance mode of the variable performance (and/or preview performance), the next special performance information currently being displayed on the right sub-liquid crystal (display screen 72a) is hidden and the performance image related to the variable performance is displayed there. In some cases, an effect image related to the variable effect is displayed in front of the next special effect information currently being displayed on the right sub-liquid crystal (display screen 72a). For example, when executing a variable effect, the entire screen of the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a) and left and right sub-liquid crystals (display screens 71a, 72a) is used to display a cohesive effect image (also referred to as "integrated effect image"). In this case, the next special performance information (pre-start image) that was displayed on the right sub-LCD (display screen 72a) before the start of display of this integrated performance image is hidden, and the integrated performance image is displayed on the main LCD and the left and right screens. Display on the sub LCD. In addition, while displaying the main effect image (effect pattern, effect pending image, background image, etc.) related to the variation effect on the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a), a preview image related to the variation is displayed on the right sub liquid crystal (display screen 72a). In this case, the preview image is displayed superimposed on the next special effect information (pre-start image) that has been displayed on the right sub-liquid crystal (display screen 72a) since before the display of the preview image starts. By changing the display content (display mode) of the right sub-liquid crystal (display screen 72a) according to the performance mode (performance pattern) in this way, it is possible to realize a variety of performance displays, which attracts the interest of the players. It becomes possible to increase interest in the game. Note that this also applies to the left sub-liquid crystal (display screen 71a).

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the performance symbol display section are replaced with special symbols (the first The variable display is synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol. That is, by displaying the 1 performance symbol (3 digits) on the performance symbol display section and synchronizing it with either the 1st special symbol or the 2nd special symbol according to the game state, it is synchronized with the 1st special symbol. and a case where it is synchronized with the second special symbol. Instead of such a mode, the first performance symbol and the second performance symbol are displayed, the fluctuating display of the first performance symbol is synchronized with the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, and the second performance symbol is synchronized with the fluctuating display of the first special symbol. The variable display may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of. In addition, when displaying both the first production symbol and the second production symbol, the production symbol corresponding to the special symbol (one special symbol) that is set as the main character of the game in the gaming state is displayed in a large size (the main character). ), and the effect pattern corresponding to the special pattern (the other special pattern) that is not the main character of the game may be displayed in a small size. Specifically, the display area is 1/5 or less. In addition, instead of displaying both the first production symbol and the second production symbol all the time, depending on the gaming state and the game situation, there are cases where both the first production symbol and the second production symbol are displayed, and a case where the first production symbol and the second production symbol are displayed. There may be a case where one of the effect pattern and the second effect pattern (the main pattern) is displayed.

Furthermore, in addition to the above-described configuration of the gaming machine, a "variable ball entrance" which can be changed between a state in which game balls can enter and a state in which game balls cannot enter and a state in which game balls cannot enter; The game apparatus may include a "special game execution means" capable of executing a special game in which the variable ball entry hole is set in a state where a ball can be entered if the result of the first or second judgment is a win. Further, the "second starting port" may be a variable starting port that can be changed between the first mode and the second mode in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than the first mode. In addition, there is a game state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is a predetermined frequency (first gaming state), and a game state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable starting port is higher than that in the game state. (second gaming state). Here, the "predetermined frequency" includes 0.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the number of openings of the first grand prize opening or the second grand prize opening in one round is one time, but the number of openings of the first grand prize opening or the second grand prize opening in one round is The game may be played multiple times, or may have rounds with different numbers of openings. In addition, in this embodiment, the control process allows the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation to be changed simultaneously, but the control process allows the second special figure reservation to be given priority over the first special figure reservation. , a so-called special figure 2 priority control process, a control process in which the first special figure reservation is given priority to the second special figure reservation, and a so-called special figure 1 priority control process. In addition, priority is not set for extinguishing the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation, and among the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation, they are consumed in order from the oldest memorized one. The control process may be a so-called control process for digesting pitches in order of arrival (order of memory).

In addition, it is a type of pachinko game machine that does not have a probability setting means (no high probability state), and has a specific area inside, and a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball can enter. It is equipped with a grand prize opening that can change between a state in which the ball cannot enter and a state in which the ball cannot be entered. The game ball is also applied to a pachinko game machine in which a game ball enters a jackpot in a ball-enabled state and passes through a specific area, resulting in a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed, and a predetermined privilege is given. This pachinko game machine is called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine, and when the result of the judgment based on the ball entering the starting hole is a jackpot, the jackpot game is executed without passing through a specific area. Further, as a benefit, a high base state can be generated that increases the frequency of game balls entering the starting hole. Further, it is possible to have a first starting port and a second starting port, and to generate a high base state that increases the frequency of balls entering the second starting port. The present invention can be applied to all types of gaming machines.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the jackpot probability can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by deactivating or activating the probability fluctuation function, but the type (number) of the jackpot probability is not limited to this, for example, it is possible to set three or more types of probabilities, such as a medium probability (third probability) that is higher than a low probability (first probability) and lower than a high probability (second probability). Good too. Furthermore, the first low probability and the first high probability (first probability condition), the second low probability and the second high probability (second probability condition), the third low probability and the third high probability (third probability condition), etc. , multiple types of probability conditions that define the relationship between low and high probabilities are provided, and any one of the multiple types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selected), for example, when the gaming machine is powered on. Good too.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, regarding the advance judgment based on the starting pitch, the latest obtained random number value (obtained information) stored in the special figure reservation storage unit is read out, and the read obtained random number value (obtained information) is determined. (Prior judgment) (“Processing at the time of starting ball entry (S205)”; see FIGS. 11, 13, etc.), but the method of preliminary judgment is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure reservation storage section, an area (obtained information storage means) that stores the obtained information that is subject to preliminary judgment (that is, the obtained information obtained based on the starting ball) may be stored in the main control section or the sub-control section. It may also be provided in the RAM of the unit to judge (preliminary judgment) the obtained information stored in the storage area (preliminary judgment storage part). In this case, by storing the results of the preliminary determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub-control unit, it is also possible to erase the acquired information used for the preliminary determination (acquired information stored in a separate storage area). Alternatively, instead of making a preliminary determination on the acquired information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit, the preliminary determination may be made on the acquired information acquired based on the starting ball. That is, you may make it pre-determine before storing acquired information in a special figure reservation storage part. In this case, there is no need to provide an area separate from the special figure reservation storage section to store acquired information that is subject to advance determination, and there is no need to read out the acquired information stored in the special figure reservation storage section for advance determination. do not have.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, one image display device 7 (board side display means) is provided as the main liquid crystal (main display device) on the game board side (inside the game area), and one image display device 7 (board side display means) is provided on the game machine frame side (outside the game area). ) is provided with two image display devices 71 and 72 (frame side display means) as sub-liquid crystals (sub-display devices), but the sub-liquid crystals (sub-display devices) may be provided on the side of the game board 2. In this case, instead of the two sub-liquid crystals (second image display device 71, third image display device 72) shown in the previous embodiment, two sub-liquid crystals are used as the display means on the panel side. device 7), or provide one sub-liquid crystal on the game board side instead of one of the second image display device 71 and third image display device 72 (left sub-liquid crystal or right sub-liquid crystal). I can do it. Alternatively, while providing the two sub-liquid crystals (second image display device 71, third image display device 72) shown in the above embodiment, it is also possible to further provide one or more sub-liquid crystals on the game board side. be. This also allows a variety of impactful effects to be displayed using a plurality of image display devices.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a display device (the first image display device 7) provided on the game board side (inside the gaming area) and a display device (second image display device 7) provided on the gaming machine frame side (outside the gaming area) Although the display device 71 and the third image display device 72) are all image display devices consisting of liquid crystal display devices (liquid crystal display devices), the type of display device is not limited to liquid crystals, and for example, a drum display device or a drum display device. It is also possible to use a dot display, a 7-segment display, etc. Furthermore, different types of display devices may be mixed among the plurality of display devices including the main display device and the sub display device. Specifically, for example, among the first to third image display devices shown in the above embodiments, the first image display device 7 is a drum display device or a 7-segment display device, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device The image display device 72 may be a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment. Alternatively, the first image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment, and one or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may be a dot display. This makes it possible to display a variety of effects using a plurality of display devices with different display methods, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

[others]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (examples) disclosed in this specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference invention 1)
A conventional gaming machine is equipped with a first starting hole, a second starting hole, a first big winning hole, and a second big winning hole, and when a game ball enters the first starting hole, the first symbol is displayed variably, and There was one that displayed a second symbol in a variable manner when a game ball entered the second starting hole. Then, when the first symbol or the second symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, either only the first grand prize opening or the second grand prize opening is opened, or the first grand prize opening and the second grand prize opening are opened. There was a gaming machine that executed a jackpot game in which the winning openings were opened in a predetermined order (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-055811).

In addition, in conventional gaming machines, the second starting port is a variable starting port, which lowers the frequency of ball entry in a low base state and increases the frequency of ball entry in a high base state. There was a game in which players aimed at the first starting hole, and in a high base state, they aimed at the second starting hole. In addition, there have been gaming machines that perform so-called right-handed games in which players aim at the right side of the gaming area when playing a jackpot game or in a high base state. In such a gaming machine, in a low base state, a left-handed game is played, and once an advantageous state is reached, a right-handed game is played until the advantageous state ends, which adds sharpness to the game in an advantageous state. Met. However, in conventional gaming machines, the mode of transition between gaming states is uniform, and it has not been possible to provide a highly interesting gaming experience.

This Reference Invention 1 has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and unlike conventional gaming machines, it provides highly interesting gaming states, diversifies the transition modes of gaming states, and increases gaming interest. The company provides gaming machines.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is
a first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a second starting port that can change between a first state and a second state in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than the first state;
A third starting port into which game balls can enter;
first validity determination execution means for executing a first validity determination based on the ball entering the first starting port or the second starting port;
a second validity determination execution means for executing a second validity determination based on the ball entering the third starting port;
a first gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port is a predetermined frequency; and a second gaming state in which the frequency of entering the gaming ball into the second starting port is higher than in the first gaming state. , a game state setting means that can set the
A gaming machine comprising: special game execution means capable of executing a special game when the result of the first validity determination or the second validity determination becomes a jackpot (first specific result); the mouth is provided in the first gaming area;
The second starting port and the third starting port are provided in a second game area,
A first game (low probability low base state) in which a game ball is fired into the first game area in the first game state and the first judgment is mainly performed; and a second game in the second game state. A second game (low probability/high base state) in which a game ball is fired into the area and the first judgment is the main one; 2. A third game (high accuracy/low base state) in which the game is mainly executed based on a judgment of validity.

According to such a gaming machine, the first starting port for executing the first validity determination is arranged in the first game area, and the first validity determination is executed in the second game area (the first state and the second state are different from each other). A variable-type second starting port (which changes to a variable value) and a third starting port that executes the second propriety judgment are arranged. In addition, as a game state, there is a first game state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port is low (predetermined frequency), and a first gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port is higher than in the first gaming state. and a high second gaming state. Then, in the first game state, a first game in which the gun is fired aiming at the first starting port in the first gaming area and the first judgment is mainly executed, and in the second gaming state, the second starting port in the second gaming area is executed. A first game in which the game is fired aiming at the target and the first validity determination is executed as the main character, and a second game in which the game is fired aiming at the third starting port in the second game area in the first game state and the second validity determination is mainly executed. 1 game.

As a result, players can play the first game, second game, and third game with different game modes depending on the transition of the game state, and can increase their enjoyment of the game through various game state transition modes and new playability. It becomes possible. In addition, in the first game state, the frequency of ball entry into the first game area and entry into the first starting port is higher than the entry frequency at which the ball is released into the second gaming area and enters the second starting port. may be higher.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1,
As a result of the first validity determination in the first game in which a game ball is fired into the first game area, a first jackpot and a second jackpot are obtained;
having a first jackpot and a second jackpot as a result of the first judgment in the second game in which a game ball is fired into the second game area;
As a result of the second validity determination in the third game in which a game ball is fired into the second game area, a third jackpot and a fourth jackpot are obtained;
In the first game, when the result of the first validity determination is the first jackpot, the second game can be executed, and when the result of the first validity determination is the second jackpot, the third game can be executed. year,
In the second game, when the result of the first judgment is the first jackpot, the second game can be executed, and when the result of the first judgment is the second jackpot, the third game can be executed. year,
In the third game, when the result of the second judgment is the third jackpot, the second game can be executed, and when the result of the second judgment is the fourth jackpot, the third game can be executed. It is characterized by the following.

According to such a gaming machine, the result of the first validity determination in the first game in which the game ball is fired into the first game area, and the first validity determination in the second game in which the game ball is fired in the second game area. As a result, there is a first jackpot and a second jackpot, and as a result of the second win/fail determination in the third game in which the game ball is fired into the second game area, there is a third jackpot and a fourth jackpot. Then, in the first game after the start of the game, when the result of the first validity determination becomes the first jackpot, the second game becomes executable, and when the second jackpot occurs, the third game becomes executable. In addition, in the case of the second game, when the result of the first judgment in the second game becomes the first jackpot, the second game can be executed, and when the second jackpot occurs, the third game can be executed. In addition, in the case of the third game, when the result of the second judgment in the third game becomes the third jackpot, the second game becomes executable, and when the fourth jackpot occurs, the third game becomes executable.

Thereby, even if the first game after the start of the game results in either the first jackpot or the second jackpot, the subsequent game is played by firing the game ball into the second game area. In addition, even if the second game is played while playing the game of firing to the second game area, or the third game is played, the game in which the first judgment is made (second game) and the third game are performed. 2. It is possible to play a game while changing the game mode (game state) between the game (third game) in which a win/fail judgment is performed. Furthermore, this makes it possible to increase the interest in the game through various transition modes of game states and novel gameplay.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2,
In the second game, the second game state becomes the first game state and shifts to the first game based on the first validity judgment being executed a specific number of times. .

According to such a gaming machine, when the first validity judgment is executed a specific number of times in the second game, the second game state becomes the first game state, and the game shifts to the first game. As a result, the second game is shifted to the first game by executing the validity determination a specific number of times. In addition, in a game in which the same first validity determination is executed, the firing game to the second game area is shifted to the firing game to the first game area. Furthermore, this makes it possible to increase the interest in the game through various transition modes of game states and novel gameplay.

Incidentally, the third game may be continued even if the second judgment of validity has been executed a specific number of times. Further, the third game may be continued until the result of the second win/fail determination becomes a jackpot.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-3,
A small win (second specific result) is obtained as a result of the second validity determination, and when the small win occurs, a predetermined amount of gaming profit can be obtained,
The second validity determination has a higher possibility of the small hit than the first validity determination,
In the second game, the first validity determination is executed more frequently than in the first game, so that the rate of decrease of game media used in the game is slower than in the first game,
The third game is characterized in that the speed at which the game media decreases is slower than that in the second game because it is possible to obtain gaming profits through the small winnings.

According to such a gaming machine, there is a small win that allows a predetermined amount of gaming profit to be obtained as a result of the second judgment, and the second judgment has a higher probability of winning a small prize than the first judgment. It is considered a hit. That is, the third game has a higher probability of winning small than the first game and the second game. Further, in the second game in the second gaming state, the first validity determination is executed more frequently than in the first game in the first gaming state. In the second game, the rate of decrease in game media used in the game is slower than in the first game, and in the third game, the rate of decrease in game media used in the game is slower than in the second game. As a result, the third game is more advantageous than the second game, and the second game is more advantageous than the first game. Furthermore, this makes it possible to diversify the transition modes between various gaming states with different degrees of advantage, and to increase the interest in the game through new gameplay. Note that the second validity determination may have a small hit, but the first validity determination may not have a small hit.

Furthermore, a fourth game (high-accuracy, high-base state) may be provided in which a game ball is fired into the second game area in the second game state and the first judgment is mainly performed. Further, the fourth game may be continued until the next jackpot occurs. In addition, in the fourth game, the first win/fail judgment is executed more frequently than in the first game, so that the speed of decrease of the game media is slower than in the first game, and in the third game, the game medium is reduced by a small hit. By making it possible to earn profits, the rate of decrease in game media may be slower than in the second game and the fourth game. Furthermore, since both the second game and the fourth game are in the second game state, the speed of decrease of the game media may be approximately the same.

In addition, in the first game, when the result of the first judgment is the first jackpot (corresponding to the 4R fourth jackpot of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first judgment is the second jackpot (corresponding to the 4R fourth jackpot of Example 1). If the result of the first validity determination becomes the fifth jackpot (corresponding to the 4R third jackpot of Example 1), the third game can be executed. Enables execution of the fourth game,
In the second game, when the result of the first validity determination becomes the first jackpot (corresponding to the 4R fourth jackpot of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first validity determination becomes the second jackpot (corresponding to the 4R fourth jackpot of Example 1). If the result of the first correctness determination becomes the fifth jackpot (corresponding to the 4R third jackpot of Example 1), the third game becomes executable. make the game executable,
In the third game, when the result of the second validity determination becomes the third jackpot (corresponding to the 2R seventh jackpot of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the second validity determination becomes the fourth jackpot (corresponding to the 2R seventh jackpot of Example 1). If the result of the second judgment is a sixth jackpot (corresponding to the 2R sixth jackpot of Example 1), the third game can be executed. ,
In the fourth game, when the result of the first validity determination becomes the first jackpot (corresponding to the 4R fourth jackpot of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first validity determination becomes the second jackpot (corresponding to the 4R fourth jackpot of Example 1). If the result of the first correctness determination becomes the fifth jackpot (corresponding to the 4R third jackpot of Example 1), the third game becomes executable. It is also possible to make the game executable.

Furthermore, the "reduction rate of game media used in games" refers to the rate of decrease of game media used in a unit time (e.g., 1 minute) or the number of shots fired (e.g., 100 shots) over the same period. The number obtained by subtracting the game media (paid-out prize balls) is calculated as the decreased number of game media (game balls). In the first game, the second game, the third game, and the fourth game, when playing for a predetermined period of time, the rate of decrease in the game media (game balls, balls held) held by the player is determined in descending order of decreasing rate. , the first game>second game (fourth game)>third game. In addition, in the third game, it is possible to increase the number of balls held by small wins as the game continues, so it can be said that the decreasing speed is negative. In other words, the first game, the second game, and the fourth game are played while decreasing the number of balls held, while the third game is played while increasing the number of balls held.

In addition, the jackpot type (first jackpot type) when the result of the first judgment is a jackpot is different from the jackpot type (second jackpot type) when the result of the second judgment is a jackpot. It may be many. In addition, as a third game (high accuracy low base state) that occurs as a result of the second judgment, there is a case where the third game is reached after a jackpot game in which it is difficult to obtain the prize ball, and a case where the third game is reached after a jackpot game in which it is difficult to obtain the prize ball. A case where the game becomes a third game after passing through an easy jackpot game. In addition, there is no case where the third game (high accuracy/low base state) that occurs as a result of the first judgment is a third game that goes through a jackpot game in which it is difficult to obtain the prize ball. It may be provided only when a third game is reached after a jackpot game that is easy to obtain.

Further, the probability of occurrence of a small hit in the second judgment is set to be higher than the probability of a jackpot in the high probability, so that the probability of occurrence of a small win in the second judgment is increased. More preferably, the probability of occurrence of a small hit in the second validity determination is 1/2 or more. Furthermore, the probability of entry into a high probability state (probability of operation of the probability variation function) is the same between the first validity determination and the second validity determination. On the other hand, the probability of entering state C (high certainty low base state) may be different between the first validity judgment and the second validity judgment, and the probability of entering state C (high certainty low base state) of the second validity judgment may be different. The entry probability may be higher than that of the first validity determination. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the game of launching into the second game area where the third game in which the second validity determination is performed can be executed, and it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the case of a jackpot that does not enter state C (high probability low base state) in the second judgment, the jackpot is the number of prize balls that can be obtained among the jackpots (jackpot game) in the second judgment. is the least jackpot (jackpot game). Further, the jackpot is the jackpot (jackpot game) with the smallest number of prize balls that can be obtained among the jackpots (jackpot game) in the first and second judgments.

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that increases gaming interest by diversifying the transition modes of gaming states.

(Reference invention 2)
In some conventional gaming machines, a win/fail determination is made based on the entry of a game ball into a starting hole, and symbols are displayed in a variable manner based on the result of the win/fail determination. In such gaming machines, if the result of the judgment is a jackpot, the symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, and if the result of the judgment is a loss, the symbol is stopped and displayed as a missing symbol. . Furthermore, there was a gaming machine that had a plurality of symbols, including special symbols and performance symbols (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-370).

In addition, the special symbols and performance symbols of conventional gaming machines are both displayed in a variable manner and in a static manner based on the result of the determination of validity. In addition, the special symbols are displayed in a stopped state without performing a game effect such as a reach variation after being displayed in a variable manner to indicate the result of a win/fail judgment, and the performance symbols are displayed in a stopped state after a variable display is performed and then a game effect such as a reach variation is performed. This indicates the result of the judgment. By having a plurality of symbols in this way, it was possible to control the display according to the purpose of each symbol.

However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, it is not easy to check the consistency of both symbols due to the display mode and display position of the plurality of symbols. The present invention 2 has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a fair gaming machine by making it easy to confirm a plurality of symbols by displaying the plurality of symbols.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is
Appropriateness determination execution means that executes validity determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
a first identification information display unit (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) that variably displays first identification information (special symbol) based on the result of the validity determination;
a second identification information display section (effect pattern display section 7b) that variably displays second identification information (effect pattern) based on the result of the validity determination;
a third identification information display section (fluctuation state display 49) that variably displays third identification information (state symbol, confirmation symbol) based on the result of the validity determination;
a game performance display section (performance symbol display section 7b, first display screen 7a) capable of displaying a game performance (reach performance, etc.) executed in accordance with the variable display of the second identification information;
A gaming machine comprising a special game execution means capable of executing a special game when the result of the validity determination is a specific result,
a first display section (main display 40) having the first identification information display section and the third identification information display section;
The present invention is characterized by comprising a second display section (image display device 7, display screen 7a) having the second identification information display section and the game effect display section.

According to such a gaming machine, the first identification information display section variably displays the first identification information (special symbol, first special symbol, second special symbol), and the first identification information display section variably displays the second identification information (production symbol). A second identification information display section that displays the third identification information (status symbol, confirmation symbol) in a variable manner, and a game performance that is executed in accordance with the variable display of the second identification information can be displayed. It has a game effect display section. Further, a first display section configured to include a first identification information display section and the third identification information display section, and a second display section configured to include a second identification information display section and a game effect display section. It has a section and a.

As a result, by checking the second display section, it is possible to check the second identification information indicating the result of the judgment of validity and the game effect, and by checking the first display section, it is possible to check the result of the judgment of judgment based on the result of the judgment. The first identification information and the third identification information that are variably displayed can be confirmed.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1,
A gaming machine having a gaming area in which a gaming ball can flow down, and playing a game by letting the gaming ball flow down into the gaming area,
The first display section is provided inside the game area, and the second display section is provided outside the game area.

According to such a gaming machine, the first display section including the first identification information display section and the third identification information display section is arranged outside (outside) the gaming area, and the second identification information display section is arranged outside the gaming area. A second display section including an information display section and a game effect display section is arranged inside (inside) the game area. As a result, by providing a second display section within the gaming area that displays game effects such as reach effects and the second identification information indicating the result of the win/fail judgment, you can check the falling of the game ball while checking the second display section. It is possible to check the display mode. In addition, by placing the first display section, which allows confirmation of the first identification information and the third identification information, separately from the second display section and outside the gaming area, the first display section, which allows confirmation of the first identification information and the third identification information, can be placed outside the gaming area. It becomes possible to reliably grasp the display mode of the identification information and the third identification information.

The first display section is placed outside the gaming area (an area outside the rail members that partition the gaming area), and the second display section is placed inside the gaming area (an area inside the rail members that partition the gaming area). It may also be placed in

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2,
The first display section is composed of an LED, the second display section is composed of a liquid crystal,
The second display section is characterized in that it is larger than the first display section.

According to such a gaming machine, the first display section is configured with an LED, the second display section is configured with a liquid crystal, and the second display section is larger than the first display section. As a result, it is possible to keep the display mode of the first display section simple so that the display mode of the first identification information and the third identification information can be grasped reliably, and the second display section is made larger than the first display section. By configuring the display with a liquid crystal, it is possible to execute various and diverse game performances and increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3,
a main control unit having the validity determination execution means;
a sub-control unit that receives a control signal from the main control unit and performs control;
The display of the first identification information display section constituting the first display section is controlled by a main control section, and the display of the third identification information display section and the second display section constituting the first display section is controlled by a sub-control section. It is characterized by display control.

Such a gaming machine includes a main control section and a sub-control section that receives control signals from the main control section and performs control. The display of the first identification information display section of the first display section is controlled by the main control section, and the display of the third identification information display section is controlled by the sub control section. Further, the display of the second display unit that displays the game effects and the second identification information is controlled by the sub-control unit. That is, the first display section displays first identification information whose display is controlled by the main control section and third identification information whose display is controlled by the sub-control section. Thereby, by checking the first display section, it is possible to check the display mode of the identification information (first identification information and third identification information) controlled by the main control section and the sub-control section. Moreover, this makes it possible to easily confirm the consistency of the identification information controlled by the main control unit and the sub-control unit.

The main control unit is a control unit that executes display control of special symbols, control related to correctness judgment, control related to sensor detection, control related to ejection of prize balls, and control related to opening and closing of the variable ball entrance, and is a control unit that controls games. It is. In addition, the sub-control unit is a control unit that receives control signals from the main control unit and performs predetermined control, and is the main control unit that performs control related to game effects such as operation control of movable members and display control of the effect display unit. This is a control section subordinate to the control section.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4,
a game information storage means capable of storing predetermined game information;
A power supply means (power supply board 109) that supplies power;
a memory storage means capable of storing and retaining game information stored in the game information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after power supply is stopped, based on detecting a drop in power supply voltage;
comprising a game information recovery means for restoring the game information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected, based on the game information stored and held by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power;
When the game information recovery means restores the game information, the third identification information display section recovers faster than the second display section, making it possible to execute display control.

According to such a gaming machine, a gaming information recovery means is provided for restoring the gaming information when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected, based on the gaming information stored and held by the memory holding means when power supply is started. . When restoring the game information, the third identification information display section included in the first display section recovers faster than the second display section, making it possible to execute display control. The second display section is made up of a liquid crystal display in order to diversify game presentations, and because it performs a variety of display controls, it takes a certain amount of time to restore game information. On the other hand, since the first display section (third identification information display section), which is simply configured with LEDs, performs simple display control, it does not take a long time to restore the game information.

As a result, even if the display sections are controlled by the same sub-control section, the third identification information display section is restored before the second display section, and display control can be executed as soon as possible. In addition, although this makes it possible to start the game as soon as the main control unit returns after power supply starts, the second display unit, which is made up of liquid crystal, takes time to recover (it still does not recover after starting the game). (not). Even in such a situation, by checking the third identification information display section, which became popular early on and made it possible to start display control, it is possible to check the display content to be controlled by the sub-control section.

According to the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2, the display mode of the plurality of symbols makes it easy to confirm the plurality of symbols, and it is possible to provide a fair gaming machine.

(Reference invention 3)
Conventionally, gaming machines are equipped with presentation devices such as liquid crystal displays, movable accessories (gimmicks), and speakers, and various presentations are performed as the game progresses. Some gaming machines of this type have a function of using a real-time clock (RTC) or the like to execute a special performance that is different from the usual performance that accompanies the progress of the game every time a predetermined time is measured. By installing multiple gaming machines with these functions side by side on the island equipment in the gaming hall, special performances by multiple gaming machines can be executed at the same time at a predetermined period (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011 (Refer to Publication No.-180295).

However, the function of executing a special performance at predetermined time intervals is already well known, and simply providing this function is not sufficient to improve the game's interest.

The third embodiment of the present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to improve the game entertainment of a game machine equipped with a function of executing a special performance at predetermined time intervals.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 is
identification information display means capable of displaying identification information;
special game execution means capable of executing a special game in which a predetermined gaming profit can be awarded to a player based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming a specific display result;
a special performance period generating means capable of generating a special performance period in which a special performance image is displayed on a predetermined display section at a predetermined period;
A performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to perform a suggestion effect that suggests the possibility that the display result of the variable display will become the specific display result,
The present invention is characterized in that the suggestive performance can be executed in different ways depending on when the special performance period is not occurring and when the special performance period is occurring.

According to such a gaming machine, a specific display is displayed depending on when a special performance period that can occur at a predetermined period is not occurring (during a period other than the special performance period) and when it is occurring (during a special performance period). Suggestion effects that suggest the possibility of deriving a result (expectation level) can be executed in different ways. For this reason, the mode of suggestive performance (performance content) may be different between the period other than the special performance period (hereinafter also referred to as the ``normal performance period'') and the special performance period. It becomes possible to perform suggestive effects depending on the mode (content of the effect). Thereby, it is possible to enhance the performance effects of both the special performance period (display of special performance images) and the suggestive performance, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 mentioned above,
The suggestion effect is performed by displaying on a predetermined display section a suggestion image that is an image whose display mode can change and suggests the level of the possibility according to the display mode;
The performance execution means is
When executing the suggestion effect when the special effect period has not occurred, displaying a first suggestion image as the suggestion image on a first display section;
When executing the suggestion effect while the special effect period is occurring, a second suggestion image different from the first suggestion image is displayed on the second display section different from the first display section as the suggestion image. The feature is that the image is displayed smaller than the first suggestion image.

According to such a gaming machine, when the suggestion effect is executed during the normal effect period, the suggestion effect is executed by displaying the first suggestion image whose display mode can change on the first display section. Ru. On the other hand, when the suggestion effect is executed during the special effect period, the suggestion effect is executed by displaying a second suggestion image whose display mode can change on a second display section different from the first display section, In this case, the second suggestion image is displayed smaller than the first suggestion image. For this reason, in the suggestion performance executed during the normal performance period, the suggestion image (first suggestion image) is displayed prominently to draw the player's attention to its display mode (suggestion performance), while during the special performance period In the suggested effect that is executed, the suggested image (second suggested image) is displayed sparingly so as not to spoil the effect of the special effect image, while suggesting the possibility that the display result of the variable display will become the specific display result. becomes possible. As a result, it becomes possible to create suggestive performances with different impressions between the normal performance period and the special performance period, and it becomes possible to attract the interest of the player by the difference.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 mentioned above,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to perform a high-expectation performance that suggests that the above possibility is high,
When the above-mentioned suggestion effect is executed and then the high expectation level effect is executed when the special effect period has not occurred, the display mode of the first suggestion image displayed in the suggestion effect is a predetermined display mode. The high expectation level performance is executed after a predetermined period of time has passed since the change to
A timer image indicating the elapse of the predetermined time is displayed on a predetermined display section from when the display mode of the first suggestion image changes to the predetermined display mode until the predetermined time elapses. It is something to do.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform a high-expectation performance that suggests that the display result of the variable display of identification information is likely to be a specific display result, and the suggestive performance can be performed during the normal performance period. is executed and the display mode of the first suggestion image changes to a predetermined display mode, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the change, a high expectation effect is executed. Then, until a predetermined time has elapsed after the display mode of the first suggestion image changes to a predetermined display mode, a timer image indicating the elapse of the predetermined time is displayed on the predetermined display section. For this reason, during the normal performance period, first, the player is made to pay attention to whether or not the suggestion performance is executed, and when the suggestion performance is executed, the player is focused on the display mode of the first suggestion image in the suggestion performance. When the display mode of the first suggestion image becomes a predetermined display mode, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timer image that indicates the remaining time until the high expectation performance is executed. . This makes it possible to effectively increase the expectations of players who are waiting for the execution (occurrence) of a high-expectation performance, and improve the game's interest when the special performance period is not occurring (during the normal performance period). becomes possible.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 or 3-2 mentioned above,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to perform a high-expectation performance that suggests that the above possibility is high,
When performing the high expectation performance, the suggestive performance can be executed prior to the execution.

According to such a gaming machine, when a high expectation effect is executed that suggests that the display result of the variable display of identification information is likely to be a specific display result, the suggestion effect is executed prior to the execution. It is considered possible. Therefore, by executing the suggestive performance, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation for the execution (occurrence) of the subsequent highly anticipated performance. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the suggestive performance.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 or 3-4 described above,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the high expectation performance in the same manner both when the special performance period is not occurring and when the special performance period is occurring. It is.

According to such a gaming machine, high expectation performance can be performed in the same manner during the normal performance period and the special performance period. Therefore, regardless of whether a special performance period is occurring or not, it is possible to make the high expectation performance the same mode (performance content). Thereby, it becomes possible to standardize the high expectation performance and make the performance easy for players to understand.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 or 3-4 described above,
The performance execution means is characterized in that the high expectation performance can be executed in different ways depending on when the special performance period is not occurring and when the special performance period is occurring. It is.

According to such a gaming machine, the high expectation performance can be executed in different manners during the normal performance period and the special performance period. For this reason, it becomes possible to perform a highly anticipated performance in a mode (performance content) suitable for each of the normal performance period and the special performance period. This makes it possible to differentiate high-expectation performances and attract players' interest in the differences.

According to the third embodiment of the present invention described above, it is possible to improve the interest in playing a game machine having a function of executing a special performance at predetermined time intervals.

(Reference invention 4)
Conventionally, gaming machines are equipped with presentation devices such as liquid crystal displays, movable accessories (gimmicks), and speakers, and various presentations are performed as the game progresses. Some gaming machines of this type have a function of using a real-time clock (RTC) or the like to execute a special performance that is different from the usual performance that accompanies the progress of the game every time a predetermined time is measured. By installing multiple gaming machines with these functions side by side on the island equipment in the gaming hall, special performances by multiple gaming machines can be executed at the same time at a predetermined period (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011 (Refer to Publication No.-180295).

However, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines that have the function of executing special effects at predetermined time intervals.

This reference invention 4 has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and its purpose is to improve the convenience of a gaming machine equipped with a function of executing a special performance at every predetermined time.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is
In a gaming machine that plays games using predetermined gaming media,
an input means for a player to input;
A clock means capable of measuring time;
A performance control means capable of controlling the performance,
The performance control means is
A special performance can be executed based on the time measurement result by the time measurement means,
generating a reception period for accepting input from the input means within a predetermined time before the start of the special performance;
The present invention is characterized in that execution of the special effect can be stopped based on an input by the input means during the acceptance period.

According to such a gaming machine, a reception period for accepting input by the input means occurs within a predetermined time before a special performance that can be executed based on the time measurement result by the time measurement means is started, and during that reception period, It is possible to stop the execution of the special performance based on the input by the input means. Therefore, by making an input using the input means during the reception period, the player can arbitrarily stop the execution of the special performance before it starts. This makes it possible to improve convenience by adding a function to cancel special effects based on the timing results.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 mentioned above,
The performance control means is
during the acceptance period, displaying a selection image on a predetermined selection image display section that prompts the player to make a selection regarding execution or non-execution of the special effect;
If the result of the input by the input means during the acceptance period is a selection result to the effect that the special performance is not to be executed, the execution of the special performance is stopped.

According to such a gaming machine, a selection image is displayed during the reception period before the start of the special performance, and the result of the input made during the reception period is a selection result indicating that the special performance will not be executed. In this case, execution of the special performance is canceled. Therefore, the player can view the selection image displayed during the acceptance period and use the input means to make a selection regarding execution or non-execution of the special performance. This makes it possible to make the player aware of the occurrence of the acceptance period through the display of the selection image, and to make the player select whether or not to execute the special performance.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 or 4-2 described above,
The performance control means is characterized in that, when the execution of the special performance is stopped, information regarding the special performance to be performed next time based on the timing result is displayed on a predetermined information display section. .

According to such a gaming machine, when the execution of the special performance is stopped based on the input by the input means, information regarding the special performance to be performed based on the next time measurement result is displayed. Therefore, by viewing the display of information regarding the next special performance, the player can learn about the cancellation of the current special performance and the next special performance that will be executable. This makes it possible to improve convenience by adding an information display (notification) function regarding the special performance scheduled to be performed next time as well as a function to cancel the special performance scheduled to be performed this time.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 4-1 to 4-3 mentioned above,
a first image display means provided so that the displayed content is visible at approximately the center of the gaming area formed on the gaming board;
a second image display means provided so that display content is visible at a location away from the center of the gaming area;
A gaming state control means capable of changing the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
The special effect is executed by displaying a predetermined special effect image,
The performance control means is
displaying a predetermined performance image on the first image display means in the special game state;
When executing the special effect in the special game state, displaying the special effect image on the second image display means,
When the special effect is executed when the special effect is not in the special game state, the special effect image is displayed on the first image display means.

According to such a gaming machine, the first image display means is provided such that the displayed content is visible at approximately the center of the gaming area, and the displayed content is made visible at a location away from the center of the gaming area. In the special game state, a predetermined effect image corresponding to the special game state is displayed on the first image display means (also referred to as main display means). When a special effect is executed in this state, a special effect image related to the special effect is displayed on the second image display means. On the other hand, when a special effect is executed when the special effect is not in the special game state, a special effect image related to the special effect is displayed on the first image display means. Therefore, depending on whether or not the gaming situation when the special effect is executed based on the timing result is a special game state, the display location of the special effect image becomes the first image display means, or the display part of the special effect image becomes the second image display means. It can also be used as a display means. Thereby, it becomes possible to appropriately display the special effect image related to the special effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 mentioned above,
The special effect image displayed on the second image display means is characterized in that its display size is smaller than the special effect image displayed on the first image display means.

According to such a gaming machine, when the special effect image is displayed on the second image display means, the display size of the special effect image is smaller than that when the special effect image is displayed on the first image display means. considered small. Therefore, when a special effect is executed during execution of a special game, the special effect image related to the special effect is displayed in a small size on the second image display means. Thereby, even if a special effect is executed during execution of a special game, it becomes possible to display the special effect image without interfering with the visibility of the image for the special game.

According to the fourth embodiment of the present invention described above, it is possible to improve the convenience of a gaming machine having a function of executing a special performance at predetermined time intervals.

(Reference invention 5)
Conventionally, gaming machines are equipped with presentation devices such as liquid crystal displays, movable accessories (gimmicks), and speakers, and various presentations are performed as the game progresses. Some gaming machines of this type have a function of using a real-time clock (RTC) or the like to execute a special performance that is different from the usual performance that accompanies the progress of the game every time a predetermined time is measured. By installing multiple gaming machines with these functions side by side on the island equipment in the gaming hall, special performances by multiple gaming machines can be executed at the same time at a predetermined period (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011 (Refer to Publication No.-180295).

However, the function of executing a special performance at predetermined time intervals is already well known, and simply providing this function is not sufficient to improve the game's interest.

This reference invention 5 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to improve the gaming interest of a gaming machine equipped with a function of executing a special performance at every predetermined time.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is
Acquired information storage means capable of storing acquired information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port;
A determining means for determining the acquired information;
Identification information display means that displays a variation of identification information based on the result of the determination;
special game execution means capable of executing a special game in which a predetermined gaming profit can be awarded to a player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result;
A clock means capable of measuring time;
and a performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
The performance execution means is
A special production that includes a lead performance and a preliminary performance that is performed prior to the lead performance;
A specific suggestion effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result can be executed,
Executing the special performance based on the time measurement result by the time measurement means,
Executing the specific suggestion effect at a predetermined time from the start of the special effect until the end of the preceding effect based on stored acquisition information that makes the display result of the variable display the specific display result. It is characterized by the following.

According to such a gaming machine, a variable display of identification information is performed based on a determination result of acquired information obtained by entering a game ball into the starting port, and the display result of the variable display is a specific display result. Then, a special game in which a predetermined gaming profit can be given to the player becomes possible. Based on these games, special performances and specific suggestive performances are possible. The special performance includes a lead performance and a preliminary performance that is performed prior to the lead performance, and can be executed based on the results of time measurement by a timer. Further, the specific suggestion effect is a effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the identification information is a specific display result. When executing a special production, a specific suggestion production may be executed at a predetermined time from the start of the special production to the end of the preceding production (before the start of the lead performance).In this case, the specific suggestion production is based on the variable display. This is based on the fact that acquired information that makes the display result a specific display result is stored in the acquired information storage means. Therefore, if a specific suggestion performance is executed at a predetermined time from the start of the special performance to the end of the preceding performance, the specific suggestion performance will store the acquired information that is the trigger for deriving the specific display result (the trigger for executing the special game). It functions as a performance that foretells what is about to happen. As a result, when a special performance is executed based on the timing result by the timing means, the player is made to pay attention to whether or not a specific suggestion performance is executed before the start of the main character appearance related to the special performance. It becomes possible to improve interest.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 mentioned above,
comprising a game state control means capable of controlling the game state after the special game,
The gaming states include at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
The specific display results include a first specific display result in which the gaming state after the special game is the first gaming state, and a second specific display in which the gaming state after the special game is the second gaming state. There is a result,
The performance execution means executes the above-mentioned performance based on the fact that acquired information is stored that makes the display result of the variable display the two specific display results at a predetermined time from the start of the special performance to the end of the preceding performance. It is characterized by the fact that a specific suggestive performance may be executed.

According to such a gaming machine, when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, the gaming state after the special game based on this becomes the first gaming state, and the second specific display result. In this case, the game state after the special game based on this becomes a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state. When executing a special production, a specific suggestion production may be executed at a predetermined time from the start of the special production to the end of the preceding production (before the start of the lead performance).In this case, the specific suggestion production is based on the variable display. This is based on the fact that acquired information for which the display result is the second specific display result is stored in the acquired information storage means. Therefore, if a specific suggestion performance is executed at a predetermined time from the start of the special performance to the end of the preceding performance, the specific suggestion performance will store acquired information that triggers a shift to a relatively advantageous second gaming state. It is a forewarning of what is to come. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to whether or not the specific suggestion performance is executed when the special performance is performed based on the time measurement result by the time measurement means.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 or 5-2 mentioned above,
The gist is that the performance execution means may execute the specific suggestion performance when the preceding performance ends.

According to such a gaming machine, when a special performance is executed based on the time measurement result by the timekeeping means, the specific suggestion performance can be executed when the preceding performance related to the special performance ends. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to recognize the end timing of the preceding performance as the execution timing of the specific suggestion performance. Thereby, it becomes possible to increase the interest when the preceding performance related to the special performance ends.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 5-1 to 5-3 mentioned above,
The preceding performance is characterized in that it is a countdown performance that displays a countdown until the appearance of the main character starts.

According to such a gaming machine, when a special performance is executed based on the time measurement result by the timing means, a countdown performance that displays a countdown until the main character appearance related to the special performance starts is executed as a preceding performance. be done. Therefore, the countdown performance (countdown display) that is performed prior to the main character appearance indicates the remaining period until the main character appearance starts (in other words, until the preceding performance ends), and the countdown performance (countdown display) that is performed prior to the main character appearance indicates the remaining period until the main character appearance starts (in other words, until the preceding performance ends), and it is specified in the period. If the suggestion effect has not yet been executed, it indicates the remaining period until the end of the period in which the specific suggestion effect can be executed. Furthermore, if a specific suggestion effect is to be executed when the preceding effect ends, it indicates the remaining period until the specific suggestion effect is executed. This makes it possible to increase interest during the period from the start of the special performance to the start of the starring role.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 5-1 to 5-4 mentioned above,
Equipped with an input means for the player to input,
The performance execution means is characterized in that it is possible to stop execution of the special performance based on an input by the input means within a predetermined time before the start of the special performance.

According to such a gaming machine, execution of the special performance can be stopped based on an input by the input means within a predetermined time period before the start of the special performance. Therefore, by making an input using the input means, the player can arbitrarily stop the execution of the special effect, and when the player cancels the execution of the special effect, the fluctuating display Execution of the specific suggestion effect based on the fact that the acquired information that makes the display result of is the specific display result is also stopped. This makes it possible to set (select) the performance execution mode according to the player's preference.

According to the fifth embodiment of the present invention described above, it is possible to improve the gaming interest of a gaming machine that is equipped with a function of executing a special performance at predetermined time intervals.

Note that any two or more inventions of Reference Inventions 1 to 5 described above may be combined.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 Game board, 3 Game area, 3A Left game area (first area), 3B Right game area (Second area), 7 Image display device, 7a Display screen, 8 Production pattern, 20 First start mouth, 21 second starting opening, 26 third starting opening, 28 gate, 30 first big winning opening, 35 second big winning opening, 41a first special symbol display (first special symbol display), 41b second Special symbol display device (second special symbol display section), 71 second image display device, 71a display screen, 72 third image display device, 72a display screen, 80 main control board (main control section), 90 sub-control board ( 92 RTC (timekeeping means), 100 image control board (image control section).

Claims (1)

identification information display means capable of displaying identification information;
special game execution means capable of executing a special game in which a predetermined gaming profit can be awarded to a player based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming a specific display result;
a special performance execution means capable of executing a special performance with a predetermined execution period at a predetermined cycle;
comprising a preview effect execution means capable of executing a preview effect indicating the possibility that the display result of the variable display will become the specific display result,
The preview performance includes at least a first preview performance and a second preview performance,
The first preview performance is executed by displaying a suggestive image suggesting the possibility on a predetermined display section,
The preview performance execution means is
It is possible to execute the second preview performance after executing the first preview performance both outside the execution period and during the execution period of the special performance,
When the first preview performance is executed outside the execution period of the special performance, a first suggestion image is displayed as the suggestion image, and when the first preview performance is executed during the execution period of the special performance, the first suggestion image is displayed as the suggestion image. Displaying a second suggestion image having different display content from the first suggestion image as an image,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second preview performance can be executed in the same manner outside the execution period of the special performance and during the execution period.

Images